4188 856 PDF

by Honeywell
Generic Commissioning Instructions

for Vigilon 4/6 loop & Compact (VA) range of fire panels & network nodes
1
Zones 17
Fault
Power Fault
System Fault
Delay
2
18
3
19
4
20
5
21
6
22
7
23
8
24
9
25
10
26
Zones
15 16
11 12 13 14
30 32
27 28 29 30
4
20
5
21
6
22
7
23
8
24
9
25
10
26
11
27
12
28
13
29
14
30
15
30
16
32
Fire
Verify
15:45
Sounder
Vigilon Compact Voice Alarm System

GENT 2010
Designed to EN54 Pts 2, 4 & 16
Delay
CB253
Test
CB253
CB254
CB254
Power
Disablement
Power
Previous
3
19
Panel healthy
System Fault
Sounder
Vigilon Fire System

GENT 2009
Pt 2 & 4
Designed to EN54
2
18
Power Fault
Verify
Healthy
Test
1
17
Fault
Fire
15:45
Next
Previous
Next
Disablement
Panel healthy
15:45
Vigilon Compact Fire System
GENT 2009
Designed to EN54 Pt 2 & 4
Voice Alarm Zones
10
All Zones
Speak Now
MIC
Auxiliary messages
TEST START
TEST END
STAND DOWN
Clear Zones
VA Activated
Emergency messages
ALERT
EVACUATE
BOMB
EN54 Part 2, 4 & 16
by Honeywell
Vigilon
0XXXx
IS
SU
COMPACT VOICE
4188-856_issue 5_08/10_Generic Vigilon (Compact + VA) Comms.
Commissioning instructions
Contents
Contents - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2
Abbreviations - - - - Preface - - - - - - - Associated documents Conventions - - - - -
5
5
5
5
Preliminary information - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6
Safety information
Pre-visit checks - Pre-commissioning
Points to remember
6
6
6
7
A typical commissioning process- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8

Product Approval and Standards - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11
Fire detection and alarm control panel - - - - - - - - - S-Quad Sensors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Sounder Strobe - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Interface Units - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 34K Sensors and Manual Call points (Supported products)
11
11
12
13
13
Fire Panels - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 14
Vigilon Compact Panel (EN) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 14
Vigilon Compact VA panel (EN)- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 14
Vigilon 4/6 loop panels (EN/BS) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 15
Controls and indications - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 16

Vigilon 4/6 loop Panels - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 21
Contents
Second fix parts - - - - - - Remove the protective covers

Fitting the inner door - - - Printer paper roll - - - - - Setting the DKC card - - - Card installation - - - - - Terminals on Terminal Card Pre power-up checks - - - Mains supply wiring - - - Battery installation - - - - -
21
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
27
28
PSU LED indications - - - - - - - - - - Write protect link on backplane - - - - - How to configure the 'U' buttons - - - - - How to configure the CB253-CB254 LEDs Factory settings - - - - - - - - - - - - - How to fit the outer door - - - - - - - - -
29
29
30
30
31
31
Vigilon Compact Panel - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 32

Cards and internal cables of the panel - - - - - - - - - - - - Installing a replacement MCB in an older Vigilon Compact panel
Terminals on the Master Control Board (MCB) - - - - - - - - Settings on the DKC - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Pre Power up checks - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Battery Installation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Mains supply - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - How to configure the monitored input - - - - - - - - - - - - How to configure the U1 and U2 buttons - - - - - - - - - - - How to configure the LEDs CB253 and CB254 - - - - - - - External printer - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Factory settings - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
33
34
35
36
37
37
38
39
40
40
41
41
Vigilon Compact Voice Alarm Panel - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 43

Cards and internal cables of the panel - - Terminals on the Audio Control Card - - Terminals on the Master Control Board- - Pre power up checks - - - - - - - - - - Battery Installation - - - - - - - - - - - Mains supply - - - - - - - - - - - - - - External printer - - - - - - - - - - - - - How to configure the monitored input - - How to configure the buttons U1 and U2 - How to configure LEDs CB253 and CB254
How to check and set the audio signal - - Factory settings - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
44
45
46
46
47
48
48
48
48
48
49
49
Indications on power up - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 50
Initial tests - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 50
Useful menu options - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 51
Panel Buzzer - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 51
Software version check - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 51
Vigilon 4/6 loops & Compact (VA) panels & network nodes
How to create an Engineer PIN - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 52

How to change the Customer PIN - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 52
How to erase a PIN - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 52
Address allocation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 53
Address allocation with Loop circuit end 1 connected Allocation faults - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - How to re-allocate addresses to a loop circuit - - - - Address allocation with Loop circuit End 2 connected -
53
54
54
54
SAFE Addressing - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 55
To SAFE address a device - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 55
To convert from SAFE to soft address - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 55
Checking a loop map - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 56

To find devices on a loop circuit - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 56
Non Volatile Memory (NVM) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 57

NVM Hardware Write protect - - - - - - - NVM Software - 'write protect' and 'unprotect'
To back up loop data to NVM - - - - - - - To recover loop data from NVM - - - - - How to electrically erase the NVM - - - - - -
57
58
58
58
59
Loop circuit tests - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 60

Loop resistance and capacitance
How to [Repair] a loop circuit Loop short circuit test - - - - Ground break test - - - - - - Positive line break test- - - - Earth fault test - - - - - - - -
60
60
60
61
61
62
Checking device STATUS- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 63

Device checks - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 65
Checking the time averages - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 65
Checking the Exception/Subfault codes- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 66
Condition Codes for S-Quads (Exception / Sub Fault codes) - - - - - - - - - 67
Pre Fire, Fire and Super fire - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 68

S-Quad Sensor STATES- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 69
S-Quad Heat sensor STATES - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 70
S-Quad Dual Optical & Heat / Optical & Heat sensor STATES
S-Quad Dual Optical, Heat & CO sensor STATES - - - - - S-Quad Optical sensor STATES - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Beam sensor STATES- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
70
71
71
72
34000 range of sensors STATES (for reference only) - - - - - - - - 73

Optical heat sensor (plus sounder) STATES (34000 range) - - - - - - - - - - 73
Heat sensor STATES (34000 range) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 74
Interface Unit STATES - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 75

Single channel interface input STATES - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 75
4 - Channel Interface Unit STATES - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 75
Installed equipment tests- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 76

Preparation - - - - - - - - - - - - Communication to site occupants - Commissioning Tool - - - - - - - Plant equipment- - - - - - - - - - Zone 'Test' mode - - - - - - - - - 'Commission' mode - - - - - - - - Fire Sensors - - - - - - - - - - - Manual Call Points - - - - - - - - Interface Units - - - - - - - - - - S Cubed - - - - - - - - - - - - - Repeat panel - - - - - - - - - - - Mimic Panel - - - - - - - - - - - Mains powered DAU and micro DAU
Vigilon Compact VA system- - - - Deviations from standards - - - - - -
76
76
76
76
76
76
77
77
77
78
78
78
78
78
78
Vigilon Compact Network - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 79

Single Network - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Wiring the single network - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Single network without domain bridge - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Network Card for Vigilon Compact - baud and node address switch settings
Powering-up the Network - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - How to check a Network map - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - How to check Network Card status - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Fault Finding - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - High errors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
79
80
80
81
82
82
83
83
83
Contents
Password or PIN code - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 51
Single Vigilon Network - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 84

Single Network - - - - - - - - - - Wiring a Copper network - - - - - Wiring a Fibre network - - - - - - Single network without domain bridge
Powering-up the Network - - - - - How to check a Network map - - - How to check Network Card status - Fault Finding - - - - - - - - - - - High errors - - - - - - - - - - - - -
84
85
85
86
86
86
87
87
87
Multiple Vigilon Networks - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 88

Domain Bridge using Input Output card - - Two networks using Domain bridge IO card Star network using Domain bridge IO cards IO domain bridge network switch settings - Message routing - - - - - - - - - - - - - Domain bridge message passing tests- - - - Domain bridge using Fibre Optic network card
FO Domain Network switch settings - - - - -
88
88
88
89
90
91
91
92
Appendix A-1 - Menu maps for EN54 (V4) Vigilon panels - - - - - 93

Appendix A-2 - Menu maps for BS (V3+) Vigilon panels - - - - - - 102
Appendix B - Message Action List - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 111
Clearable fault events Latching fault events Repairable fault events
Message Action list - -
Zones - - - - - - - - - - Groups - - - - - - - - - - Zone Tasks - - - - - - - - Command Builds - - - - - Sounders Configuration - - S-Cubed Mark I - - - - - - S-Cubed Mark II and S-Quad
Auxiliary Relays - - - - - -
140
140
141
142
143
144
144
145
Appendix D - Guidelines for Networked system commands - - - - - 146

Master Sectors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 146
Master Groups - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 147
Appendix E - Cards - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 149

Appendix F - Spare parts - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 151
Beam sensor (Legacy) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 153
To assemble the Parallel bracket Initial alignment - - - - - - - Selecting gain- - - - - - - - - Coarse adjustment- - - - - - - Time averages - - - - - - - - Fine adjustment - - - - - - - - -
153
154
154
154
155
155
111
111
111
111
Appendix C - Guidelines for standalone system commands - - - - - 131
Contents
Labels - - - - - - - - - Long labels - - - - - - - Sectors - - - - - - - - - Integral sounder operation Default fire plan - - - - Fail safe fire plan - - - - Site specific fire plan - - Delay Blocks - - - - - - Time slots and time blocks-
131
132
135
136
137
137
137
138
139
Abbreviations
Preface
This is the fifth issue of the Commissioning instructions for the fire alarm system based on the
EN54/BS Vigilon 4/6 loop panels, Vigilon Compact panel (&VA) (with network capability)
and Vigilon Network nodes. This manual covers EN panels having Master Control Card / Master
Control Board software at version 4.43 or higher and BS panels having Master Control Card
software at version 3.97 or higher.
Associated documents
The Vigilon control panels and network nodes are supplied with respective copies of the operating
and installation instruction manuals:
EN54 Vigilon 4/6-loop panel based system - Installation instructions & Operating instructions
EN54 Vigilon Compact panel based system - Installation instructions
EN54 Vigilon Compact panel / Network node based system - Operating instructions
EN54 Vigilon Compact Voice Alarm panel - Installation instructions & Operating instructions
Vigilon Compact Network node - Installation instructions
Vigilon Network Node - Installation instructions
Commissioning tool - User guide
Conventions
"
This is a note to highlight important text that is normally hidden in the main text.
&
This is either a caution to prevent damage to the equipment or a

warning to inform of dangerous conditions that may result in injury or death.
Symbol Keys
What you will see.
ACC
Audio Control Card
Mpeg
ADC
Analogue to digital
converter
N/C or NC Normally closed
Common
N/O or NO Normally open
CH
channel
NVM
CO
Carbon monoxide
DAU
Distributed Amplifier Unit
O/C or OC Open circuit
DEV
Device
PA
Public Address
DIL
Dual in line
PCB
Printed circuit board
DKC
Display keyboard card
PIN
DPCO
Double pole change over

(relay contacts)
Personal identification
number
(usercode, password,
access code)
PSU
Power supply unit
PTT
Press to Talk
PVC
Polyvinyl chloride
QB
Quick blow (fuse)
EEPROM Electrically Erasable

Programmable ROM
EOL
End of line
FAB
First action byte
IO or I/O
Input Output channels
IP
Ingress protection
LED
Light emitting diode
LPC
Loop processor card
LPCB
Moving picture expert

group
Non Volatile Memory

(CARD14)
S/C or SC Short circuit

SAB
Second action byte
SAFE
Software addressed
firmware encoded
Loss prevention council

certification board
SPCO
Single pole change over

(relay contacts
MCB
Master control board
SPL
Sound pressure level
MCC
Main control card or Main

controller card (CARD 0)
Anti-surge (fuse)
USB
Universal serial bus
MCP
Manual call point
VA
Voice Alarm
What you will hear.
Preliminary information
34K Control Panels
This manual covers the Vigilon range of control
panels and does not specifically cover the
34K 4-Loop Control Panel.
For information on 34K 4-Loop Control panel refer
to Vigilon BS 4-Loop Control panel in this manual,
as both ranges of panels have version 3+ software
and the only difference is in the branding.
Safety information
&
1. Do not remove or replace printed circuit boards, fuses or attempt to wire the
control panel with the panel powered up. Always power down the mains supply
at the fused spur unit and disconnect the battery supply to the panel.
Pre-visit checks
Ensure there are accurate as fitted wiring drawings available, 2 copies are required.
Any damaged equipment has been noted for replacement.
Ensure access will be provided to system equipment installed in the protected
premises.
The installer (electrical contractor) will be in attendance until the installation is
proved.
Site contact or representative will be available during the visit.
Ensure the commissioning tool along with the associated cables and printer, plus
instructions, are available.
Ensure spare parts are available, such as:
MCP glasses
MCP test key
Printer paper roll
Equipment door keys.
Pre-commissioning
Check the installation of fire alarm equipment with reference to the most recent as
fitted wiring drawings.
2. When powering up always power-up the mains supply first before the battery
supply. The power-down should be done in reverse order.
Get the feel of the operating condition of areas on the site:

action the installer to carry out any rectification work plus
report discrepancies for administration purposes.
Where the operating condition of an area is not right for the equipment installed, then
3. When installing the cards into the master control board or backplane always
use anti-static work procedures.
the appropriate replacement action must be taken.

Ensure the fire system equipment is installed in accordance with the appropriate
standards and project specification.
4. Do not use anti-static procedures on live equipment.
Earth leads
All earth leads supplied with the system equipment must be securely fitted to
maintain earth continuity.
Parts for later installation
All unused parts should be retained in their respective container for safe keeping until
required.
Loop wiring
The loop cable should have been connected to the appropriate terminals at each
device, as shown in the installation manual in accordance with the as fitted wiring
drawings.
Enclosure
Access into equipment enclosure is usually by means of opening an outer door/cover.
A panel may also have an inner door which will also need opening.
Unattended equipment
Where equipment is to be left unattended, then it is important to close the door /cover
for safety.
Copper fingers
Copper fingers are conductive spring like strips fitted to metal assemblies. They are
fitted to shield against electromagnetic and radio frequency interferences.
Ensure the copper finger strips are intact and no damage has occurred. Damaged
fingers will reintroduce the gap to let in/out interferences.
Static precaution
The discharge of static electricity can damage or degrade sensitive electronic
components on printed circuit boards. Anti-static procedures should be followed
when handling static sensitive boards.
&
It is important that anti-static procedures are NOT carried out on live equipment.
Removal and disconnection
Any disconnection of cables or removal of parts of an assembly must be restored and
replaced.
Battery
To prevent damage to batteries and equipment, the terminals of the battery must not
simultaneously touch any conductive part of the equipment enclosure.
Sealed lead acid battery can have a useful life of up to 5 years from the date of
manufacture, it is strongly recommended that batteries are replaced after 4 years. The
batteries must be disposed of correctly by following battery manufacturers
recommendations.
Powering up
When equipment is being powered up always connect the mains supply before the
battery supply. Power-down should be done in reverse order.
&
Arcing may occur when the battery circuit is connected to mains

powered equipment.
Panel Buzzer
It may be necessary during commissioning to switch Off the panel buzzer. It is
possible to selectively switch the disablement, fault, fire, supervisory and command
build buzzer sound to Off or On. It is important to ensure that the buzzer is switched
On for normal operation after commissioning.
Fire plan
The system should be tested in accordance with the project specification.
Sensor cover
Each fire sensor installed in the system should have been fitted with a dust cover
during installation. The dust covers must be removed from all the fire sensors after the
panel loops have been satisfactorily powered-up and with addresses allocated to each
device ready for further checks and tests.
Site specific installation
Plant equipment interfaced to the system should be tested to recommendations made
in the project specification.
Test mode (EN - V4) & Commission Mode (BS - V3+)
During commissioning of the system you will need to switch On the Test/Commission
mode. It is important to switch Off the test/commission mode after the work is over, to
ensure the system operates normally.
Informing responsible persons
It is important to inform the person(s) responsible for the fire alarm system that
the system is being commissioned.
Points to remember
A typical commissioning process

Always power-down the panel when working on the system,
for example when wiring or replacing parts.
Pre visit checks
Ensure you have:
As-fitted-drawings showing installation of system equipment
Access to all the protected areas where system equipment is installed
Installer present to rectify wiring faults
Tools and spare parts are available.
Inform responsible person(s)
Inform responsible person(s) that the fire alarm system is being
commissioned and occupants in the protected premises will hear
test alarms.
Ensure occupants are made aware of alternative site procedures
should there be a fire event while the system is commissioned.
Initial tests and set ups

Setup Access levels PIN codes, if required
Carry out a display test and ensure DISPLAY and LEDs are working
Set the system clock time and date
Configure the RS232 printer port, if a printer is installed.
Loop Devices
Configure the links on all 4-channel interface units connected to the
loop. Ensure links are set for the required Input or Output applications
Ensure all interface Input/Output external wiring remains
disconnected at this stage, unless otherwise instructed. This
action will prevent inadvertent operation of output/plant while
the system is being commissioned.
Power up the mains powered interface unit on the loop.

Survey the installation
Refer to the most recent as-fitted-drawings and ensure that all the fire
system equipment has been installed in accordance with the
installation instructions, respective standards and project specification.
Before powering up the Panel
Open the outer cover and inner of the panel and:
Check all the internal cables within the panel are securely fitted
Fit the loop card(s) into the required location(s)
Ensure no external circuits are connected at this stage, except for
the mains supply which must be connected but not switched ON
Fit the end of line resistors to the master alarm circuits.
Connect the external printer to the RS232 port, if installed.
Ensure the input - output lines of interfaces are not connected.
Power up
Fit the batteries inside the panel enclosure and connect the battery
leads and then switch ON the mains supply.
Loop device address allocation

Connect only End 1 of a loop circuit and power-up the loop
Allow address allocation to finish. Any fault(s) on the loop during
allocation must be rectified. Power-down the loop when correcting
loop wiring faults and the power-up to continue address allocation
Connect only End 2 of the loop circuit and power cycle the loop and
ensure address allocation is complete from End 2.
Connect both End 1 and End 2 of the loop and check the loop
allocation is complete with both ends of the loop connected.
Start Detection after a successful allocation of addresses.
Check all the devices on the loop circuit are installed in their correct
location using the Find Device function at the panel and by referring
to the as fitted wiring drawings
Check to ensure correct devices are installed by viewing the
Device status
Repeat the allocation process on other loop circuits.
Continue on next page
From previous page

Configure the system, use the Commissioning Tool
Configure the system to site specific requirement using the
Programming / Commissioning tool.
Backup
Back-up the system loop address allocation data to the memory
Regularly back-up the configuration data during
commissioning, do this every 15 minutes to ensure the
changes made to the configuration is not lost.
Transmit the configured system to the panel

Connect the commissioning tool to the panel and transmit the
system configuration.
Loop wiring tests

Carry out tests on each loop wiring by introducing open and short
circuit wiring faults. Ensure the panel provides an indication of each
fault. Run the Repair function at the panel after each fault removal.
Devices set up
Ensure all devices on the loop circuits are correctly set up.
Calibrate speaker circuits on micro DAUs
Adjust volume of audio at each micro DAU and
Mains Powered DAU.
Retrieve the system data to Commissioning computer

Connect the commissioning computer and retrieve the system data,
see Commissioning tools manual.
Installed system test

Put the panel in test mode and then carry out tests in accordance with
the recommendations of BS5839:Part 1 and also in accordance
with project requirements:
Interface units
Prior to carrying out functional test on external equipment connected
to the I/O circuits, ensure the I/O circuits remain isolated.
After functional tests reconnect the I/O circuits and where appropriate
test the I/O circuits to project recommendations.
Fire sensors
Ensure a device fire causes alarms in the system to sound in
accordance with site specific requirement.
S-Cubed - The output volume of an S-Cubed can be adjusted using:
[Set up] [Setup] [Device] [S-Cubed] [Volume] command at the panel.
Repeat and Mimic panels
Check events are displayed and indicated
Connect Master alarm and Monitored input circuits and move the
end-of-line resistor to the end of the circuit.
Sounders - Conduct sound level tests to ensure the levels do not fall
below the requirements.
Strobe - Check the appropriate S-Quad and S-Cubed devices
provide the visual alarm.
Messages - Check the correct messages are announced from the
Speakers, S-Cubed and S-Quad devices where installed.
Remove the Test mode and ensure any disablements are re-enabled.
Background music and PA microphone

Connect and test Background music system
Connect and test PA microphone
Test the emergency microphone.
Procedures for Vigilon Compact VA only
Audio loop wiring tests

Connect each audio loop and carry out tests to ensure live and
auxiliary messages are outputted to the DAU speaker circuits.
Beam Sensor alignment

If there are beam sensors on the loop then commission the beam
sensor pair using the alignment and autogain function at the panel.
Continued on next page
From previous page

PIN Codes
Change the user PIN code(s) and inform the new codes to the
respective users.
Final changes to configuration

Use the panel menu options to make minor adjustments to the system
configuration and then back up the work. All major changes to the
configuration must be done using the commissioning tool.
Configuration data file

Ensure site file held at the commissioning tool is the same as the
one held at the panel for future reference and for traceability.
10
Product Approval and Standards

Fire detection and alarm control panel
The following fire detection and alarm control panels are LPCB approved.
Product number
Description
Approval
VIG1-24 & VIG1-72
EN Vigilon 4/6-loop panels
EN 54 Parts 2 & 4
COMPACT-24-N
EN Vigilon Compact 2-loop panel
EN 54 Parts 2 & 4.
The COMPACT-VA panel described in this manual is undergoing approval tests and will reach approved status on completion of LPCB tests.
S-Quad Sensors
Product number
Description
Standard
S4-720
S4-720-ST-VO
Heat sensor
Heat sensor Strobe and Speech (Speech and Strobe - no approval)
EN54 : Part 5 :2002* (heat)
S4-780
S4-780-ST
Heat Sensor plus Sounder

Heat Sensor plus Sounder & Strobe (Strobe - no approval)
EN54 : Part 5 :2002* (heat)

EN54 : Part 3 2001 - (sounder tone)
S4-715
Optical sensor
EN54 : Part 7 :2000* (optical smoke)
S4-710
Optical Heat sensors
S4-711
Dual Optical & Heat Sensors
S4-711-ST
Dual Optical & Heat Sensors Strobe (Strobe - no approval)
S4-911
Dual Optical, Heat & CO Sensors (CO - no approval)
S4-711-ST-VO
Dual Optical & Heat Sensors, Speech & strobe (Speech and Strobe - no approval)
S4-711-VO
Dual Optical & Heat Sensors, Speech (Speech - no approval)
S4-771
Dual Optical & Heat Sensors & Sounder
S4-911-ST-VO
Dual Optical, Heat & CO Sensors, Speech & Strobe

(Speech, Strobe & CO - no approval)
S4-770
Optical & Heat sensors and Sounder
* - these standards are met when the sensor is operating LPCB approved STATES, see STATES table below.
The following S-Quad sensors when operating in the STATES shown in table below are LPCB approved to the respective standard.

EN54 : Part 5 :2000* (heat)
CEA 4021 : 2003-07 Class P heat multisensor detector

EN54 : Part 5 :2002* (heat)
EN54 : Part 3 2001 - (sounder tone)
CEA 4021 : 2003-07 Class P heat multisensor detector
Sounder tone description - see next page
"
If a S-Quad sensor is configured to operate a non LPCB STATE, then this will contravene the LPCB approval. The required STATE is configured during commissioning and
can be also configured using controls at the main panel.
11
LPCB approved S-Quad Sensor STATES
LPCB approved STATE
Device
# - default STATE
Meets ~ EN54 : Part 7 :2000

* EN54 : Part 5 :2002
Dual Optical & Heat sensor variant (With Strobe)

(With Speech)
(With Strobe & Speech)
(With Sounder)
Dual Optical, Heat & CO sensor variant (With Speech & Strobe)
S4-711 State 0 #
S4-711-ST State 5
S4-711-VO
State 8
S4-711-ST-VO
S4-771
State 0 #
S4-911 State 9
S4-911-ST-VO
Medium optical smoke ~ / Class A1 heat *

Medium optical smoke ~ / Class B heat *
Delayed medium optical smoke ~ / Class A1 heat*
Class A1 heat *
Optical & Heat sensor variant (With Sounder)
S4-710 State 0 #
S4-770
(With Speech & Strobe)

(With Sounder)
(With Strobe)
S4-720 State 0 #
S4-720-ST-VO State 5
S4-780
S4-780-ST
Medium optical smoke / Class A1 heat*
Heat sensor variant Class A1 heat *

Class B heat *
Optical sensor Medium optical smoke

S4-715 State 0 #
All S-Quad range of sensor sounder devices meet CEA GEI 1 - 084 Requirements and test methods for input/output devices for use on the transmission paths of fire detection and alarm system.
Sounder tone - Meets the following tone settings: High tone ( Continuous 933Hz) & Alternate tone (High 933Hz for 0.25s / low 700Hz for 0.25s)
On initial power-up the system selects STATE 0 for all devices.
Sounder Strobe
The Sounders in the following S-Cubed Mark 1 range of products listed below are LPCB approved to EN 54 : Part 3
S3-SN-R, S3-SN-W, S3IP-SN-W, S2IP-SN-R, S2IP-SN-W, S2IP-SN-R3, S2IP-SN-W3, S3-SN-ST-RR, S3-SN-ST-WR, S3IP-SN-ST-RR, S3IP-SN-ST-WR, S3IP-SN-ST-RW, S3IP-SN-ST-WA,
S3IP-VO-W,S3-VO-W, S3IP-VO-R, S3-VO-R, S3IP-VO-ST-WR, S3-VO-ST-WR, S3IP-VO-R, S3-VO-R, S3IP-VO-ST-RR, S3-VO-ST-RR, S2IP-VO-W and S2IP-VO-R.
12
Interface Units
The following products are approved to EN54-17:2005 and EN54-18:2005
S4-34410
1 Input interface module (loop powered)
S4-34450
4 Input / output Interface module (loop powered)
S4-34420
1 Output & 1 input (confirmation) interface module (loop powered)
S4-34411
Single output interface (loop powered)
34K Sensors and Manual Call points (Supported products)
Product number
Description
Standard
Compact "O"
Optical sensor
EN 54 : Part 7 #
34710
Optical & Heat sensor
EN 54 : Part 5 and Part 7 #
34720
Heat sensor
EN 54 : Part 5 #
34770
Optical & Heat sensor + Sounder EN 54 : Part 5, part 7 and LPCB requirements #
34800-EN
Manual Call Point
EN54 Part 11
34842-EN
Manual Call Point
EN54 Part 11
If a 34K sensor is configured to operate a non LPCB approved STATE then this will contravene the LPCB approval.
# - these standards are met when the sensor is operating LPCB approved STATES, see STATES table below.
"
All the LPCB approved STATES applicable to 34K fire sensors are shown below. The required STATE is configured during commissioning. On initial power-up the system
selects STATE 0 for all 34XXX Sensor devices.
Device
Optical & Heat sensor
(34770 and 34710)
Heat sensor
(34720)
Heat Sensor plus Sounder
(34780)
LPCB approved STATES
Meets
State 0
Medium smoke sensitivity with Grade 2 heat
State 8
Smoke sensing with delay + Grade 2 heat
State 12
Grade 1 heat only
State 13
Grade 2 heat only
State 0
Default sensitivity
State 1
Grade 1
State 0
Grade 2 heat
State 12
Grade 1 heat
13
Fire Panels
Vigilon Compact Panel (EN)
Outer door
Indications
Message
Display
Access level 1
Controls
to scroll fire
events
Inner door
Key lock to open

the outer door
Access level 2
Controls
Operating instructions
and Log Book
Vigilon Compact VA panel (EN)

Indications
Message display
Inner door
Outer door
Zones
1
17
2
18
3
19
4
20
5
21
6
22
7
23
8
24
9
25
10
26
11
27
12
28
13
29
14
30
15
30
16
32
Fire
Fault
Power Fault
Verify
Panel healthy
15:45
System Fault
Sounder
Vigilon Compact Voice Alarm System

GENT 2010
Designed to EN54 Pts 2, 4 & 16
Delay
Test
CB253
CB254
Power
Disablement
Next
Previous
Voice Alarm Zones
10
All Zones
Speak Now
MIC
Auxiliary messages
TEST START
TEST END
STAND DOWN
Clear Zones
VA Activated
Emergency messages
ALERT
EVACUATE
BOMB
EN54 Part 2, 4 & 16
by Honeywell
Vigilon
Fire Panels
COMPACT VOICE
0XXXx
Access level 1
Controls to scroll events
14
Key lock to open

the outer door
Pocket for
and Log Book
Emergency
Microphone
Access level 2 & 3

Controls
Vigilon 4/6 loop panels (EN/BS)

A BS panel shown is below:
Message display
Indicators
Inner door
Outer door
Zones
1
17
2
18
3
19
4
20
5
21
6
22
7
23
8
24
9
25
10
26
11 12 13 14 15 16
27 28 29 30 30 32
Fault
Fire
15:45
Power Fault
System Fault
Delay
Vigilon Fire System

GENT 2009
Test
Disablement
Verify
Sounder
CB253
CB254
Previous
Power
Key lock to open

the outer door
Pocket for
and Log Book
Printer
Access level 2 & 3
Controls
Fire Panels
Access level 1
Controls to scroll events
Next
15
Controls and indications

Panel
buzzer
Vigilon Compact panel or

Vigilon Compact Voice Alarm panel
EN Vigilon 4-loop panel or

BS Vigilon 4-loop panel
BS Vigilon 4-loop panel:
NOT USED
1
17
Zones
2
18
3
19
4
20
5
21
6
22
7
23
8
24
9
25
10
26
11
27
12
28
13
29
Fault
14
30
15
30
16
32
Zones 1
17
Fire
2
18
3
19
4
20
5
21
6
22
7
23
8
24
9
25
10
26
11
27
12
28
13
29
14
30
15
30
16
32
Verify
Power Fault
CB253
Delay
Test
CB254
Disablement
Power
Previous
Next
Cancel Buzzer
Menu On/Off
F1
F2
F3
F4
Fire
Fault
Sounder
System Fault
Not fitted on
BS Vigilon 4-loop
panel
BS Vigilon 4-loop panel:
Commission
Warning
Power Fault
Verify
Sounder
System Fault
CB253
Delay
Test
CB254
Previous
Disablement
Power
Menu On/Off
Cancel Buzzer
F1
Sound Alarms
Sound Alarms
Verify
Next
F3
F2
F4
Verify
Reset
Silence Alarms
Enter
Silence Alarms
ABC
DEF
GHI
JKL
MNO
PQRS
TUV
WXYZ
U1
U2
THRU
INS
16
BKSP
00
"
&
:
;
Reset
Fire
Shift
.,
Insert
U1
Delete
U2
Enter
U3
Space
U4
DEL
Indications applicable for all Vigilon panels

Indicators
Description
Display
Zones
1 (red)
Power
(green)
Fire
(red)
Verify
(amber)
Fault
(amber)
System Fault
Disablement
Warning
The Display provides messages of the system status / events by means of 8 lines by 40 characters per line display.
Hidden-until-lit fire zones indicators. When "Zones" text and number(s) are illuminated it indicates that a FIRE has been detected in the
specific zone(s). (Zone indicators are not applicable for BS Vigilon panels and Network Nodes)
When illuminated it indicates that a supply to the panel is present.
When illuminated it indicates that a FIRE has been detected in the protected premises.
When illuminated it indicates that the Verify button has been pressed and the alarm sounders in the system are delayed from sounding.
When illuminated it indicates that a FAULT has been detected in the fire detection and alarm system or in the audio system.
When illuminated it indicates that a fault has occurred with the system processor. It is important to investigate this fault because the
(amber) fire alarm system may not be able to detect fires.
(amber)
(amber)
CB253 or CB254
Applicable for EN Vigilon panels only. When illuminated it indicates that a part of the system has been disabled.
Applicable for BS Vigilon panels only. When illuminated it indicates that a part of the system has been disabled, delayed or not
functioning.
When illuminated it indicates the respective command build 253 or 254 has been activated.
(amber)
Sounder
Delay
Test
Commission
(amber)
(amber)
(amber)
(amber)
(amber)
When illuminated it indicates the battery or mains supply to the panel has failed.
Power Fault
Applicable for EN Vigilon panels only

When illuminated (always with either the FAULT light or the DISABLEMENT light) it indicates that there is a sounder fault (flashing
indication) or sounder disablement (steady indication).
When illuminated it indicates that one or more delay blocks are setup on the panel.
When illuminated it indicates one or more zones are in Test mode.
Applicable for BS Vigilon panels only
When illuminated it indicates panel is in commissioning mode.
17
Controls applicable for all Vigilon panels

Controls
Description
Menu On/Off
F1
to
F4
Cancel Buzzer
Next
Pressing Menu On/Off will enable/disable the on screen menu facility which gives access to the system menus.
The 'Fn' buttons are used to select functions and sub-functions of the system menus which appear on the display. Each option available at
a menu level has an associated function button and on pressing a function button will select the option described on the display.
The Cancel Buzzer button when pressed will stop the internal panel buzzer from sounding.
Note the local buzzer is automatically silenced when the emergency microphone is being used to announce live speech from a Vigilon
Compact VA panel.
Sound Alarms
Pressing the Sound Alarms button will announce 'evacuate message' and sound the evacuate alarms. This button is only pressed in an
emergency or at other agreed times, for example when conducting a system test or practice evacuation.
Silence Alarms
Pressing the Silence Alarms button will stop emergency message announcements and silence the system alarms.
Reset
Pressing the Reset button will clear any fires and return the panel to the condition seen before the fire event. If a fire condition should
reoccur immediately after a 'reset' then the indicated device should be investigated.
Verify
If the Verify facility has been set up, then pressing the 'Verify' button soon after a fire detection will increase the time delay before the alarm
sounders are activated. This gives the user time to investigate the cause of the alarm and option to cancel the alarm within the delay time
period.
U1
The 'U' buttons can be configured during commissioning to output user-defined actions, such as to disable devices in areas where smoke
may be generated and to activate a plant shutdown, for example during a fire condition.
U2
The function of the 'U' buttons should be written on the label that is fitted on the back of the outer door.
Note: The Vigilon 4/6 loop panels have four configurable 'U' buttons.
At a Vigilon panel to operate a 'Un' key: press the 'Shift' key first then the 'Un' key.
This is pressed to acknowledge an entry of data or label text.
Enter
18
Controls applicable for Vigilon Compact (& VA) panels only:

Controls
Description
These four buttons are used to scroll the displayed text.
ABC
DEF
GHI
JKL
MNO
PQRS
TUV
WXYZ
THRU
INS
9
BKSP
00
DEL
These buttons allow data to be entered manually at the control panel.

When entering a label each press of a key will scroll the character string, for example:
key 2 will scroll A B C 2 a b c.
key 1 will scroll 1 ? , . ; & * /
The bottom row of keys are explained here:
The
button is used to enter a SPACE between characters
The INS key allows text to move one position to the right
The DEL key allows a character to be deleted
The BKSP button will delete previous character.
When entering a range data the THRU key is used to represent a '-', for example 1 THRU 5 equals 1 - 5.
19
Controls applicable for Vigilon Compact VA panel only
n
(green and red)
(Green)
All Zones
Pressing one or more of the 10 buttons selects the local Voice Alarm Zone(s) of the local
system to which emergency or auxiliary messages, or emergency microphone is to be
announced. The two LEDs beneath flash alternately to show the Voice Alarm Zone has
been selected.
On selecting the required emergency or auxiliary message only one of these LEDs changes
to steady or flashing indication determined by the type of audio to be outputted to the
selected Voice Alarm Zones. The left LED indicates auxiliary message selection while the
right LED indicates emergency message selection.
Voice Alarm Zones
10
Pressing the 'All Zones' button allows quick selection of all Voice Alarm Zones
simultaneously. The accompanying LED gives a steady indication when the button is
pressed. Note all the VA Zones that have been setup in your system will give a flashing
indication and those not setup will give no indications.
All Zones
Speak Now
Auxiliary messages
Clear Zones
Pressing 'Clear Zones' button will clear selected Voice Alarm Zones, also when auxiliary
messages are being announced pressing 'Clear Zones' will silence the announcements.
Speak Now
(green)
Speak Now
(green)
VA Activated
(green)
n
Emergency messages
(Red)
20
TEST START
TEST END
STAND DOWN
VA Activated
Emergency messages
ALERT
EVACUATE
BOMB
When the 'VA Activated' LED is illuminated it indicates the voice announcements are being
(red) made or emergency microphone is in use for speech announcement to Voice Alarms Zones.
Auxiliary messages
When 'Speak Now' light is illuminated the system is ready to allow live speech
announcement to selected Voice Alarm Zones via the Emergency microphone.
The indicator is lit following the selection of Voice Alarm Zones and on pressing the Press to
Talk (PTT) button on the Emergency microphone.
If the 'Press to Talk' button is released the 'Speak Now' indicator will flash and switch off
after 20seconds duration or immediately switch off on pressing the Clear Zone button.
Clear Zones
When illuminated the system is announcing auxiliary message n to the selected Voice Alarm
Zones.
The indicator is lit following the selection of Voice Alarm Zone(s) and on pressing the
required Auxiliary message button.
When illuminated the system is announcing emergency message n to the selected Voice
Alarm Zones.
The indicator is steady or flashing determined by the type of emergency message being
announced to Voice Alarm Zones.
Second fix parts
Vigilon 4/6 loop Panels
Check that you have the second fix parts, which are supplied with the panel:
These procedures assume the respective 1st fix assembly of the Vigilon 4 loop (VIG1-24) / 6 loop
(VIG1-72) panel is already installed. The 1st fix backbox assembly may be surface or flush
mounted.
The second fix parts must now be installed before powering up the control panel.
Cardboard cover
over PSU
Cables of external circuits

Mains cable
Earth to
inner door
EN Vigilon 4 loop
Control panel
(VIG1-24)
1
EN Vigilon 6 loop
Control panel
(VIG1-72)
1
Outer door assembly
Main Control Card
1
(Option of
up to 4 maximum)
1
(option of
up to 6 maximum)
1pack
1pack
Parts
Inner door assembly
Battery Pack (2 x 12V 21Ah)
Loop card
Hinge
points for
inner and
outer doors
Battery box
Spares pack (see installation

manual for pack content)
Remove the protective covers
Transparent
cover over
backplane
Remove the cardboard protection cover fitted over the PSU. The cover is held in by a
retaining clip.
Remove the transparent protection cover fitted over the backplane held together by an
elastic band.
Printer 0V
Hinge
points for
inner and
outer doors
Card guides
PSU
21
Fitting the inner door

Locate the hinge pins on the inner door assembly into the two hinge pin holes j on the backbox outer face.
Fit the earth lead from the backbox to the inner door spade connector k.
Fit together the two blue connectors of the printer 0V leads l, the leads are located at the inner door and backbox intersection.
Cables of external circuits
Masking tape
Inner door
Earth to
inner door
Earth spade
for connection from
backbox
Danger
WARNING
REMOVAL OF COVER
HV
VOLTAGES
EXPOSES HIGH
Preformed ribbon
cables held together
under masking tape
to be fitted during
commissioning
Transparent
cover over
backplane
Card guide
Inner
door
locating
the hinge pin
Transit position of
printer paper roll
and holder pin held
together with an elasticband
Connector for
printer 0V
Backbox
Printer 0V
Paper roll
holder bracket
Hinge point
BACKBOX (Part view)
22
Printer paper roll
"
The printer paper roll is secured with an elastic band to the card guide on the inner door.
Remove the paper roll from the card guide and install paper. Ensure the paper roll enters the printer mechanism as shown.
Door
Paper
roll
Printer
mechanism
Fold paper end thus

before attempting to
feed it through printer
Paper
feed knob
&
On the outside of the inner door there is a paper feed knob, DO NOT turn the knob in an upward direction as this may damage the integral printer.
Upon completion of all commissioning work a new paper roll should be fitted.
23
Control buttons
Setting the DKC card
"
The links, pot and switch on the DKC are factory configured as shown below.
DKC ASSEMBLY
LCD Contrast adjust

Anti-Clockwise Lighter
Danger
WARNING
REMOVAL OF COVER
H VOLTAGES
V
EXPOSES HIGH
The emergency control buttons must always be left in an enabled state, with the 'control
buttons' link fitted.
RV1
Clockwise Darker
There is no indication given at the panel when the link is set for inactive controls.
RV1
Display Contrast
The display contrast is set using the Pot RV1 on the DKC, which is factory adjusted
Inner door assembly
Display and
keyboard Card (DKC)
SW1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
OFF
Factory setting
is with link fitted
Buttons
enabled
"
Inner door
The contrast adjustment function using the menu options may not be
applicable for some older build of panels.
P1
Domain Address and baud rate settings

P6
ON
For keyswitch
application only.
Link is NOT USED
leave link fitted.
Control buttons
for optimum contrast.You can also adjust the contrast using the menu option under
[Test/Eng], see Appendix A menu maps.
Typically the Baud rate set using these switches should be the same as the setting made using the
[TestEng] menu. The baud rate set must be backed up to the NVM. Where a baud rate value that
can only be achieved by [Test/Eng] menu, this must be set using the menu and backed up to NVM.
Baud Rate
Sound Alarms
Verify
With Zone
indicators
(EN)
Zones 1
17
Reset
2
18
3
19
4
20
Domain address
Baud 3
Address
Off
Off
1200
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
64
Off
On
2400
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
On
On
Off
9600
Off
Off
Off
Off
On
Off
On
On
19200
etc
On
On
On
On
On
Off
62
On
On
On
On
On
On
63
Factory set domain address - 1 with 19200 baud (see SHADED cells)
Zone indicators
Buttons Silence Alarms
disabled
Without Zone
indicators
(BS) panel or
Network node
The Zone indicators are enabled for normal operation at the EN control panel and must NOT be
disabled.
The zone indicators are not applicable for a BS Control panel and a Network node, the 'zone
indicator' links are set in the 'disable' position.
24
Card installation
&
Backplane
When installing the cards into the backplane always use anti-static
work procedures. DO NOT use anti-static procedures on live equipment.
Secure the two ribbon

cables (at the fold) under the clamp
located on the backplane
40 way ribbon
"
An IO Card is not required for connection to DKC and neither is required to

connect to the Commissioning tool. The DKC now connects directly to the MCC card. The
Commissioning tool connects directly to the USB port on the MCC.
The two ribbon cables held together under a masking tape on the DKC assembly must be routed
into the backbox to connect to the Main Controller Card.
Card guides
Master Controller Card (MCC)

to be fitted to socket
P1 CARD 0 on backplane
Use the USB port on

the MCC to connect to
the Commissioning tool.
P1
CARD 0
Main Controller Card

(SUPPLIED)
P2
CARD15
Network or IO Card (Optional)
P3
CARD 1
Loop Processor Card (SUPPLIED)

or RS232
P4
CARD 2
Loop Processor Card or RS232

(Option)
P5
CARD 3

(Option)
P6
CARD 4

(Option)
P7
CARD 5
Network or RS232 or
Loop Card#
P8
CARD 6
Network or RS232 or
Loop Card#
Backplane
"
Ensure the two ribbon cables are secured under a clamp on the backplane and
then fit the Main Controller Card (MCC) into the backplane before ribbon cables are
connected to the MCC.
&
Always ensure the panel is completely powered down before removal

or fitting of cards into the backplane. Power down the battery supply before the
mains supply. The power up should be done in reverse order.
Ensure all the cards are installed in their correct location into the backplane and are
firmly seated into their respective slots.
20 way ribbon
# for VIG1-72 only
25
Terminals on Terminal Card

Terminal card
Terminals for Network node
Backplane
LOOP CARD IN SLOT P8 (Loop 6)

L1 0V L2 0V
5V
CARD 3
CARD 2
RS232
RS232
RS232
CTS RX RTS TX
NETWORK CARD IN SLOT P8

0V1 +VE1 -VE1 0V2 N/C +VE2 -VE2 N/C
CARD 4
CTS RX RTS TX
RS232
CTS RX RTS TX
Terminals for Control panel

LOOP 4
LOOP 3
L1 0V L2 0V
CARD 1
CTS RX RTS TX
LOOP 2
L1 0V L2 0V
LOOP 1
L1 0V L2 0V
L1 0V L2 0V
IO CARD IN SLOT P8
B 0V CTS Rx RTS TX
P2
Master alarm
MA1+ MA1- MA2+ MA2-
PB1
P3
Clean C
NC C NO
Terminals for Control panel and

Networ
IO (RS232) CARD IN SLOT P7

N/C
0V CTS RX RTS TX
LOOP CARD IN SLOT P7 (Loop 5)
L1 0V L2 0V
P5
P6
0V1 +VE1 -VE1 0V2 N/C N/C +VE2 -VE2 (WITH NETWORK CARD IN SLOT P2 OF BACKPLANE)
RS485
5V B 0V
RS232
Tx CTS Rx RTS
(WITH IO CARD IN SLOT P2 OF BACKPLANE)
PB2
PSU board (located behind the

cardboard cover)
L
P4
Auxiliary Relay 1
NC C NO NC C NO
Auxiliary Relay 2
NC C NO NC C NO
P2
P8
P7
RS232 0V
0V 0V 0V 0V
P12
26
These RS232 0V terminals

are for use with the RS232
wiring associated with IOC
fitted in Card slots 1 to 4.
Quick release terminals
Pre power-up checks
Dedicated mains supply

from consumer unit
The mains cable is the only external cable required to be connected at this initial stage and other
max. 230V ac
external cables are left disconnected until connection and test later:
all loop circuits
clean contacts
auxiliary circuits
master alarm circuits, with only the end-of-line resistors (22K Ohm) fitted to the terminals on
the terminal card to inhibit a master alarm circuit fault indication.
and RS232/RS485
5A Unswitched
fused spur unit
mains
cable
Panel
must be sleeved
50mm
35mm
"
Gland
A networked system is commissioned after all the individual standalone systems are fully
commissioned.
Ensure all cards are securely fitted into their appropriate slots on the backplane.
Ensure all ribbon cables are securely fitted into their respective sockets.
45mm
ferrite
core
(supplied)
Mains supply wiring
&
1. The fire alarm system products are NOT designed to be powered from
IT Power systems.
FIRE ALARM - DO NOT SWITCH OFF
The fused spur isolator unit cover should be marked:
P2
2. All mains powered equipment must be earthed.

Ensure the mains supply cable enters the equipment via a dedicated cable entry point, which is located
adjacent to the mains terminal block and is also segregated from any loop wiring.
Mains supply to any fire alarm control and indicating equipment must be via an unswitched 5A
fused spur unit. A disconnect device must be provided to disconnect both poles and must have a
minimum gap of 3mm. The 'disconnect device' should be available as part of the building
installation and must be easily accessible after installation is complete.
270mm
Use cable ties

(supplied)
PSU PCB
The mains cable must be stripped

back to the length shown to allow
live and neutral wires to be wound
through the ferrite core.
5mm
&
Hazardous voltage remains after operation of a protection

fuse. Take appropriate action to guard against the risk of equipment
having exposed live mains supply.
The Mains power is switched on after battery installation.
27
VIG1-72 panel battery installation
Battery installation
"
The panel makes use of sealed lead acid type batteries which can have a
useful life of 5 years or more from the date of manufacture. It is strongly recommended
that batteries are replaced after 4 years of use. All batteries must be disposed of as per
recommendation made by battery manufacturer.
&
Red
4 - 12V 21Ah batteries

Battery Box
Upper
shelf
Black
TH+ BT1+ BT2+

THBT1- BT2-
P6
P4 P3
P1 P2
TH1
Always use the recommended replacement battery. As there is a risk of

an explosion if incorrect batteries are used.
Black
Red
It is recommended that the mains supply to the panel
is switched Off during battery installation.
Fit the bolt, spade connector, washer, spring washer to
each battery terminal.
Insert the right hand battery into the back box.
BT+ BT-
Black
White
Insert the left hand battery into the back box.
P20
Ensure the batteries are held in place while they

are being wired. Ensure the battery terminals
do not come into contact with the metal enclosure.
Place the two batteries in the lower shelf and lay them
horizontally with terminals facing outwards.
Fit the bolt, spade connector, washer and spring
washer to each battery terminal as shown above.
VIG1-24 panel battery installation
Red
It is recommended that the mains supply is switched

Off during battery installation.
Fit the link lead (white) to outer + and - spade connectors

on the two batteries, as illustrated.
Lower
shelf
White.
B
Red
Black
Fit the white link lead and then fit the red/black
fused lead to the battery terminals, as shown above.
Raise the two batteries to an upright position
and push them back into the enclosure.
Black
Red
White.

Battery Box
Upper
shelf
TH+ BT1+ BT2+

THBT1- BT2-
P6
P4 P3
Fit the battery lead (red & black) assembly to the

remaining + and - spade connectors on the two
batteries, observe polarity.
TH1
Plug the battery connector into connector P20 located on

the bottom left of power supply PCB.
The panel will only power up after the mains supply
is switched On.
B
Route the battery red/black lead through hole in the shelf
of the battery box and then connect to the respective
connectors on the PCB, located on the top right side.
Add two more batteries 'B' to the lower shelf and repeat
procedures j to n.
Where required, add four batteries to the upper shelf,
using procedures j to o. The only exception
is that the red/black lead is directly connected to the
respective upper connectors on the PCB.
is switched On.
28
P1 P2
Lower
shelf
B
In-line fuse rated 10A QB ceramic 20mm x 5mm
PSU LED indications
Write protect link on backplane

PSU
Protected
- write protected
Steady indication
Unprotected
- not write protected
(factory setting)
LD2
ERROR
LD3
LD4
LD1
LD5
RAM write/read
test failed
Indicates
communicating
with MCC
ROM checksum error
EEPROM checksum error
The backplane also has the flash memory

(NVM) which is under the control of MCC and
is a shared memory to which the system
configuration data is saved.
The link header on the backplane marked
LK1 provides 'write' protection and will stop
the SAVE and BACKUP commands from the
panel controls modifying the memory.
Once the system is fully commissioned the
link LK1 should be configured to 'write
protected', this is important on sites where
customers require compliance to the EN54
Part 2 standard.
The NVM should always hold the complete
system back up.
LK1
P11
Ribbon cable to
Backplane
connector P12
Backplane
P5
Spade connector
for 0V lead to printer
LD1 LD2 LD3 LD4 LD5
LD1
LD2
LD3
LD4
LD5
Flashing indication
The backplane has the card slots to facilitate interconnection of plug-in cards, such as the Main
Controller Card (MCC), Loop Processor Cards, IO Cards and Network Cards.
P7
Ribbon cable
to Terminal Card
connector P10
The backplane assembly is fitted inside the left side of the backbox.
Indicates Thermistor is O/C or

S/C or 43V boost test has failed.
EEPROM stuck in
busy mode
EEPROM reinitialised
EEPROM read does
not match RAM copy
The above LEDs flash 1s on and 1s off.

When a LED is ON it indicates an error.
For more than one error the LEDs will flash in sequence.
29
How to configure the 'U' buttons
How to configure the CB253-CB254 LEDs
The U1, U2, U3 and U4 buttons are active at access level 2, that is the buttons are accessible by
opening the panel outer door.
The switching of the LEDs CB253 or CB254 occurs from a trigger of command builds 253 or 254.
The switching action must be configured during commissioning.
Indicators
:
;
Fire
Insert
U1
Delete
U2
Fire
Enter
U3
Space
U4
Verify
Sounder
Not on BS
panels
CB253
CB254
Part of the Keyboard
To operate a 'U' button first press the 'Shift' key and then the 'U' button. Each 'U' button is linked
with a command build:
U1 button will trigger command build number 251
During commissioning the required command build action must be configured.
Power
Example
This example shows how to configure the panel such that by activating an interface input (can be a
push button switch), it will cause the panel LED - CB254 and Master alarms to switch On. If the
interface input is released, then the panel LED - CB254 and Master alarms will switch Off.
The following procedures assume a password entry is not required.
Firstly set up command build 254 to be triggered by an interface:

Press Menu On/Off button and select [SetUp] -> [Usercode]# , momentarily press <etc> to select
[SetUp]
and [Build], type in the command build number 254, select [Trigger] and [IO line], type in
Example
the interface input channel number, select [Device], type in the interface device number, select
This example shows how to configure the U1 button such that pressing it will start the master alarm
[Loop], type in the loop number and then select [Enter]. The command build 254 is now
sounders and pressing 'U1' button again or pressing the Silence alarm button will stop the
configured to be triggered by the interface input.
sounders.
Now to create a command build label:
Press Menu On/Off button and select [SetUp] -> [Usercode]# , momentarily press <etc> to
Press Menu On/Off button and select [SetUp] -> [Usercode]#, momentarily press <etc> to select
select [SetUp] -> [Build] and type in the command build number 251, select [Action] -> [Start
[SetUp]
and [Build], type in the command build number 254, select [Label] and type in a label of
MA] -> [Enter] -> [Reversbl] -> [Enter]. The U1 button is now configured to start the master alarm
up
to
40
characters in length, select [Display] to display the label on the panel when the command
sounders.
build 254 is triggered.
# - will appear if a PIN is setup.
Now to set up the action of command build 254:
[SetUp] and [Build], type in the command build number 254, select [Action] and [Start MA],
[Enter], [Reversbl] and [Enter].
30
Factory settings
How to fit the outer door
An EN Vigilon 4/6 loop control panel has the following factory settings:
To fit the outer door you will first need to close the inner door and secure it to the backbox using the
two fasteners located on the right edge of the inner door.
System configuration
All devices are assigned to Sector 1

All devices are assigned to Zone 1
Fit the Outer door to the enclosure by hooking it onto the side hinge pins. The outer door may be
secured to the backbox using the key lock.
Port settings
P3 - USB
(on MCC)
Options:
P0 - RS232 - (Terminal card - terminals P4) when an optional IOC is fitted in slot P2 of backplane
P1 - RS485 - (Terminal card - terminals P4) when an optional IOC is fitted in slot P2 of backplane
Addresses
Domain address - 0 for BS Panel and 1 for EN panel

Panel (Node) address - 1
NVM protect
Software 'write' allowed (NVM protect - disabled)
Hardware 'write' allowed (NVM protect -disabled)
31
Vigilon Compact Panel

The following procedures assume the fire alarm control panel is installed, with cables terminated at the backbox and with the inner and outer doors fitted.
These procedures assume the protective cover fitted over the Master control board (MCB) inside in the backbox has been removed.
Connect flying earth lead j from the back box to the inner door.
If not already done remove the protective cover k fitted over the Master control board inside in the backbox.
Connect the ribbon cable l from the Display KEYBOARD(DKC) to socket marked 'KEYBOARD' on the Master control board. Secure the ribbon cable to the side of the
enclosure using the cable clamp provided.
Ribbon cable
and clamp
Cardboard cover protecting

the Master Control Board
and Loop Card
Plastic cover
protecting PSU
Inner door
Back box
NET 1
END 1
NET 1
END 2
Cover to protect the

Display and keyboard PCB
MAINS
SUPPLY
LOOP 1
END 1
Earth lead from

back box to inner door
Master
alarms 2
LOOP 1
END 2
Master
alarms 1
ESD Earth
Bonding point
Warning
removal
of cover
exposes
live parts
Battery
bracket
WARNING
REMOVAL OF COVER
EXPOSES HIGH VOLTAGE
32
Setting the Rotary switch SW2
Cards and internal cables of the panel
Master Control
Board (MCB)
KEYBOARD INDICATORS AND DISPLAY

24V 0V
TX1 RX1 0V TX2 RX2
NC C NO NC C NO NC C NO L1 0V L2 0V
L1 0V L2 0V
0V MIPNC C NO
Power Supply Unit

(PSU)
N
MA1+ MA1- MA2+ MA2-
This switch is set to the required position for the panel build on leaving the
factory. Before installing the Loop cards and Network card onto the Master
control board MCB ensure the switch j SW2 is set to a required setting if
the panel is to be installed in an existing system, see table on the next page.
L
P2
KEYBOARD
PB15
WARNING
REMOVAL OF COVER
PB6
PB10
PB14
24V
PB8
MA2 - FS2 250mA
CARD 2
P2
DANGER
FS3 3.15A(T)
Mains fuse
MA1 - FS1 250mA
FS3 200mA
P1
PB9
PB11 PB7
CARD 1
NVM hardware link P13
The NVM can be enabled or disabled by setting the hardware link k on the
MCB. If the NVM protect is hardware disabled then it is also possible to
software enable or disable the NVM using the [Protect] option under the
[Setup] menu at the panel.
FIRMWARE BACKUP
Warning
Removal of
cover exposes
live parts
DANGER
IC16
0V L1- L1+
0V L2- L2+
POWER
SUPPLY
P12
PP2
PB1A
SW2
MODE
PB1B
P13
P2
P1
P3
P16
SW1
RESET
Installing the Cards
FS4 24V - 1A TE5

FS1 Bat 1- 3.15A TE5
FS6 43V
1A TE5
SW2
MODE
P13
Loop Card 1
P7
BAT1
BATT3
Remove
insulation disk
Network Card
Loop Card 2
Unprotect: Normally during commissioning the NVM is disabled

(unprotected) and writing to NVM is allowed.
Protect: Once the configuration is backed up to the NVM the hardware link
must be in the enabled position to disallow writing to the NVM.
NVM Protect - [Disabled]
P13
NVM Protect - [Enabled]
The MCB can accommodate two Loop Cards. One Loop card l can be
fitted into the slot labelled CARD1 and the other Loop card n into the slot
labelled CARD2.
"
A networkable system has a Network Card m fitted into

the slot CARD 2 on the MCB and additionally the Network Card can
accommodate the second Loop card.
SW1
RESET
Earth Link
Battery
The lithium battery s is disconnected on leaving the factory by means of an insulation disk over
the top connector. The insulation disk must be removed before powering up the system.
BATT3
Remove Sleeve
The earth link lead o is supplied with the Network Card. This link lead
must be fitted to the spade connector on the top edge of MCB with the other
end to the spade connector on the Network Card.
Terminals
The terminal blocks p on the top edge of the MCB are used for wiring
external circuits. The terminal block q on the top edge of the PSU is used
for wiring the mains supply to the panel. The connector r located on the
bottom edge of the PSU board is used to connect the battery supply.
33
IC3
Installing a replacement MCB in an older Vigilon Compact panel

These instructions cover how to fit a replacement Master Control Board (VCS-MCB-N) into a COMPACT-24 (non
networkable) or COMPACT-24-N (networkable) Vigilon Compact panel.
Replacement Master Control Board (MCB)
- networkable
B
TX1 RX1 0V TX2 RX2
KEYBOARD
PB15
PB6
L1 0V L2 0V
PB14
PB10
24V
MA1+ MA1- MA2+ MA2-
PB8
MA1 - FS1 250mA
FS3 200mA
P1
0V MIPNC C NO
PB9
PB11 PB7
MA2 - FS2 250mA
CARD 2
P2
P15
KEYBOARD
24V 0V
OLD Master Control Board (MCB)

- non networkable
CARD 1
P10
P11
P6
P14
24V
FS3 200mA
P1
P7
P9 P8
MA2 - FS2 250mA

MA1 - FS1 250mA
CARD 2
P2
CARD 1
FIRMWARE BACKUP
IC16
BATT1
POWER
SUPPLY
P12
SW2
MODE
CODE
PRINTER
IC3
BCKUP
POWER
SUPPLY
P12
IC3
P13
P16
IC16
P16
SW1
RESET
BATT3
P13
SW1
Insulation Disk
&
- When a network card is fitted onto the MCB then ensure a spade tab (supplied) is fitted under
the PCB fixing screw at position u.
- Also ensure the bottom PCB fixing screw v is tightened to give good electrical connection.
How to replace the MCB
There are in existence four variants of Vigilon Compact panels in the field. Here are the steps to replace an MCB
fitted in a Vigilon Compact panel.
Save Configuration to Commissioning tool
If the panel is functioning correctly then before powering down ensure the system configuration is
retrieved to the laptop via commissioning tool.
Power down
Completely power down the panel by isolating the mains and battery supply and then remove the
ribbon cable connectors from the MCB.
34
Remove the cards

Remove the Loop card(s) and Network card# from the MCB and then
Remove the MCB from the panel. (# - where applicable)
Select the firmware part number and set the rotary switch
Make a note of the firmware number on the chip in socket IC3 of the
MCB being replaced. Determine the applicable switch setting
required from the table below and set the rotary switch on the
replacement MCB.
The firmware in socket
IC3 of MCB being
replaced
2211-148
2211-146
2211-136
2211-127
Applicable setting of switch

SW2 on replacement MCB
0
1
2
3
Re-fit the cards
Fit the replacement MCB into the panel and reconnect the ribbon
cables, and then fit the previously removed Network and Loop cards.
An earth lead must be fitted between the spade tabs u on MCB and
Network card.
Configuration
Using a chip extractor extract the back up 'Configuration' chip fitted
in socket IC16 (NVM) of the MCB being replaced and fit this chip
into the replacement MCB.
&
Where the Configuration chip is known to be corrupt or

is incompatible then DO NOT fit the chip into the replacement
MCB. Instead transmit the saved configuration from the
commissioning tool to the replacement MCB. The transmission
must take place after panel power up. After transmitting the
configuration to the panel 'back up' the data to NVM on Card 14.
Power up
Power up the mains and battery supplies to the panel.
Descriptions of MCB terminals
Terminals on the Master Control Board (MCB)

NC C NO NC C NO
NC C NO
PB10
AUXILIARY RELAY 1
PB11
AUXILIARY RELAY 2
L1 0V L2 0V
L1 0V L2 0V
PB14
LOOP 2
PB7
LOOP 1
TX1 RX1 0V TX2 RX2
0V MIPNC C NO
PB6
RS-232
PB9
MONITORED INPUT
and CLEAN CONTACTS
MA1+ MA1- MA2+ MA2-
24V 0V
TX1 RX1 0V TX2 RX2
PB15
KEYBOARD
PB15
REPEAT
INDICATOR
RS-485
PB6
L1 0V L2 0V
PB14
PB10
PB8
MA1 - FS1 250mA
FS3 200mA
P1
MA1+ MA1- MA2+ MA2-
PB9
PB11 PB7
24V
0V MIPNC C NO
PB8
MASTER ALARMS
Description
24V, 0V, B and A
These terminals accept the connection of a repeat indicator

panel (Port 0). The power terminals may be used on a
Network node to supply BACnet Gateway.
NC, C and NO
Aux 1- 2-sets
Aux 2 - 1set
These are auxiliary relay contacts. The auxiliary relay 1 is

normally de-energised and operates with any fire event. The
auxiliary relay 2 is normally energised and operates with any
fault event.
0V, TX, A, RX
and B
These are terminals for RS232 or RS485 (Port 1 or 2

respectively).
L1, 0V, L2, 0V

(Loop 1 and
Loop 2)
These terminals accept the connection of system devices on

a two-wire loop that starts at L1 and ends at L2. Devices that
are connected to the loop circuit include addressable fire
sensor/sounders, manual call points, interface units and
repeat/mimic panels.
MA1+, MA1-,
MA2+ and MA2-
These terminals can accept two master alarm circuits that

can operate 24V conventional alarm devices.
0V and MIP
These are monitored input terminals that can accept the

connection of a switch. An active input will trigger Command
build 250.
NC, C and NO
(clean contact)
These are voltage free relay contact outputs that operate

with a fire event.
MA2 - FS2 250mA
CARD 2
P2
CARD 1
24V 0V
Terminals
FIRMWARE BACKUP
IC3
IC16
POWER
SUPPLY
P12
SW2
MODE
P13
P16
SW1
RESET
BATT3
Master Control Board
35
Control buttons
Settings on the DKC
&
The links and pot on the DKC are factory configured as shown below.
LCD Contrast adjust
Anti-Clockwise Lighter
The emergency control buttons MUST always be left in an enabled state, with the
'control buttons' link fitted.
RV1
Clockwise Darker
There is no indication given at the panel when the links are set for inactive
controls.
RV1
Display and
keyboard Card (DKC)
Display Contrast
The display contrast is set using the Pot RV1 on the DKC, which is factory adjusted
for optimum contrast.You can also adjust the contrast using the menu option under
[Test/Eng].
Inner door
P1
P6
For keyswitch
application only.
Link is NOT USED
leave link fitted.
"
The contrast adjustment function using the menu options may not be
applicable for some older build of panels.
Address and baud rate
"
The node and domain addresses can be changed from the factory settings to
a required address using the panel [Test/Eng] menus.
Zone indicators
Control buttons
Factory setting
is with link fitted
Buttons
enabled
Sound Alarms
Verify
The Zone indicators are enabled for normal operation at the control panel and must NOT be
disabled.
With Zone
indicators
(EN)
Zones 1
17
2
18
3
19
4
20
The zone indicators are not applicable for a Network node so the zone indicator's links are set in
the disabled position.
Reset
Buttons Silence Alarms
disabled
36
Without Zone
indicators
Network node
Pre Power up checks
Battery Installation
The mains cable is the only cable required to be
Remove the battery support bracket from the backbox.

Fit the battery lead to the PSU.
Fit the batteries in the correct orientation inside the backbox.
Refit the battery bracket to secure the batteries in place.
PSU BOARD
P3
&
43V
FS6
1A P7
BAT1
Ensure the mains cable to the panel is

securely connected to the mains terminal block on
the Power supply unit (PSU).
Ensure all cards are securely fitted into their
+
Red
Black
appropriate slots on the MCB.
Ensure all ribbon cables are securely fitted into their
Y1 Y2 G1
24V FS4 - 1A
PANEL
Bat1 - FS1 - 3.15A
connected, with other external cables are left

disconnected at this stage of commissioning:
loop circuits
clean contacts
auxiliary circuits
master alarms (the 10K Ohm end-of-line resistor
is fitted to inhibit a fault indication).
Monitored input (the 10K Ohm end-of-line
resistor is fitted to inhibit fault indication).
+
Black
respective sockets.
"
The panel makes use of sealed lead acid type batteries which can have a useful life of 5 years or more from the
date of manufacture. It is strongly recommended that batteries are replaced after 4 years of use. All batteries must be
disposed of as per recommendation made by battery manufacturer.
&
Always use the recommended replacement battery, as there is a risk of an explosion if incorrect
batteries are used.
Connect the battery leads as shown but leave the final circuit connection until after the Mains supply is switched On.
37
2 - 12V 12Ah battery
P3
230V ac
43V
FS6
1A P7
BAT1
5A Unswitched fused
spur unit
Y1 Y2 G1
PSU BOARD
24V FS4 - 1A

from consumer unit
Bat1 - FS1 - 3.15A
PSU Indicators
Mains supply
PANEL
- +
N
L
P2
FS3 3.15A(T)
Mains fuse
&
Ensure the mains supply cable enters the panel through a dedicated
cable entry point.
"
These fire alarm system products are NOT designed to be powered from an IT
Power system.
Y1 Y2 G1
DANGER
Description
Y1
(yellow LED)
Y2
G1
(yellow LED) (green LED)
Normal condition
(no faults in the system)
fast flash
Mains out of limit
slow flash
24VDC failure only
fast flash
fast flash
Battery 1 failure only
slow flash
fast flash
All mains powered equipment must be earthed. Mains supply to any fire alarm control and
indicating equipment must be via a dedicated unswitched 5A fused spur unit, which should be
clearly labelled FIRE ALARM - DO NOT SWITCH OFF.
Battery 1 and 24VDC failure
slow flash
fast flash
A 'disconnect device' must be provided to disconnect both poles and must have a minimum gap of
3mm. The device should be available as part of the building installation and must be easily
accessible after installation is complete.
Earth fault only
&
Hazardous voltage remains after operation of a protection fuse. Take

appropriate action to guard against the risk of equipment having exposed live
mains supply.
38
43VDC failure only
fast flash
fast flash
No power to PSU
On
On
On
"
On initial power-up all three PSU LEDs will switch ON for approximately
1 second.
PSU EEPROM link

Ensure a shorting link is fitted to the programming header P1 located on the PSU. The link must be
fitted such that it shorts pins 1 and 2. This enables the EEPROM hardware write protect.
How to configure the monitored input

Normally open contacts
These contacts can be a push button
switch, fire/fault relay contacts from
another panel or contacts from a timer.
"
The link is supplied fitted on the PSU board manufactured after September 07.
2 - 10K Ohms resistors must be
fitted as shown.
P3
43V
FS6
1A P7
BAT1
Y1 Y2 G1
0V MIP
- +
P8
Monitored Input
MASTER CONTROL
BOARD
PANEL
An active input will trigger

the command build No 250
The command build action
is configured
during commissioning
The monitored input at the fire panel is activated by an external switch installed a maximum of
100m cable distance away from the fire panel. The input is monitored for both short and open
circuit faults. When the input is active it triggers the command build number 250 of the fire panel.
Example
The following example shows how to configure the monitored input at the panel to provide an
output sound signal 1 alarm in sector 2 of loop 1 as a reversible action. This means on operating or
"closing" the monitored input the panel will start alarm in sector 1 and on releasing or "opening" the
monitored input the panel will stop all the alarm from sounding.
[SetUp] -> [Build] and type in the command build number 250, select [Action] -> [UserCode],
momentarily press <etc> to select [Sector], type in 2 for sector 2 and select [Loop] and type in 1
for Loop 1 -> [Action] -> [Signal 1] -> [Enter] -> [reversb] -> [Enter].
39
P1
24V FS4 - 1A
Ensure a link
is fitted accross
pins 1-2
Bat1 - FS1 - 3.15A
PSU BOARD
(part view)
How to configure the U1 and U2 buttons
How to configure the LEDs CB253 and CB254

Sounder
U1
CB253
CB254
U2
Power
"
Example
The switching of the LEDs CB253 and CB254 is controlled by action of command builds 253 and
254 respectively. The switching action must be configured during commissioning.
The U1 and U2 buttons are accessible by opening the panel outer door.
On operating the U1 or U2 at the panel it will cause triggering of command build number 251 (for
button U1) or command build number 252 (for button U2). During commissioning the required
command build action must be configured.
This example shows how to configure the panel such that by activating an interface input (can be a
push button switch), it will cause the panel LED - CB253 and Master alarms to switch On. If the
interface input is released then the panel LED - CB253 and Master alarms will switch Off.

Example:
Example
[SetUp] -> [Build] and type in the command build number 253, select [Trigger] -> [IO line] and
This example shows how to configure the U1 button such that pressing it will start the master alarm type in the interface input channel number, select [Device] and type in the interface device number,
sounders releasing the U1 button will stop the sounders. Additionally the sounders can be stopped select [Loop] and type in the loop number -> [Enter]. The command build 253 is now configured to
by pressing the Silence alarm button on the panel.
be triggered by the interface input.
Press Menu On/Off button and select [SetUp] -> [Usercode]# , momentarily press <etc> to
Now to configure the command build label:
select [SetUp] -> [Build] and type in the command build number 251, select [Action] -> [Start
MA] -> [Enter] -> [Reversbl] -> [Enter]. The U1 button is now configured to start the master alarm [SetUp] -> [Build] and type in the command build number 253, select [Label] and enter a label of
sounders.
up to 40 characters in length, select either [Display] to display the label on the panel when the
command build 253 is triggered.
Now to setup the action of command build 253:
[SetUp] -> [Build] and type in the command build number 253, select [Action] -> [Start MA] ->
[Enter] -> [Reversbl] and [Enter].
40
External printer
Factory settings
An external printer (part number COMPACT-HAND) may be connected to the control panel during
commissioning. It is essential that the printer is connected to the RS232 - Port 1.
An EN Vigilon Compact Control panel has the following factory settings:
GND

Port settings
P0 - RS485, Baud: 1200 Mode: Repeat
TX1 RX1 0V TX2 RX2
Terminal P6 - PORT 1 of Master Control Board

(Card 0)
PB6
PORT 1 is configured for RS232 Communication.

The PORT 1 mode must be set to Printer and
the baud rate maybe adjusted
if required during commissioning.
Ensure panel and printer baud rate are set to
the same value.
P1 - RS232, Baud: 38400, Mode: Standard

RS-232
MASTER CONTROL
BOARD
PANEL
The panel's baud rate for Port 1 is factory set to 1200, and the factory set Mode is Standard and
must be changed to Printer when a printer is connected to Port 1.
How to configure Port 1 mode to the printer

To configure Port 1 to the Printer mode: Press Menu On/Off button and then select [Test/Eng]->
[Usercode]#, select <etc> and then select [Config]. Momentarily press <etc> to select [Comms].
Then select [Card] and enter 0 on choosing the master control card. Then enter 1 to select Port 1.
Select [Mode] and using the [Previous] and [Next] buttons scroll to Printer and select by the
[Enter] option.
P3 - USB
Addresses
Domain address - 1 for EN panel

NVM protect
Software write allowed (NVM protect - disabled)
Tx
Rx
Tx
Hand held printer
GND
Rx
9-way D-type
connector
Download lead - 77821-01NM
To switch ON the printer

If the printer is not working and is switched Off then you can switch it On. To switch On the printer:
Press Menu On/Off button and then select [Control] -> [UserCode]# and select [Printer] and
then select [On] and [Enter].
41
This page has been intentionally left blank.
42
Connect the 40-way ribbon to the socket labelled

KEYBOARD on MCB and secure cable to side of
the enclosure.
Vigilon Compact Voice Alarm Panel
Remove the protective cover fitted over the printed circuit boards located inside the
backbox.
Fit the earth lead to the inner door
P Clip for
mains cable
ACC DKC
WARNING
REMOVAL OF COVER
MCB
Earth Lead
Ensure the earth lead located around the top right of the backbox is connected to the
spade connector on the inner door.
ACC
PSU
DKC ribbon cable

Connect the 40-way ribbon cable from the DKC to the socket marked KEYBOARD
on the left edge of the Master Control Board (MCB). Secure the ribbon cable to the
side of the enclosure using the cable clamp provided.
ACC DKC ribbon cable

Route the 14-way ribbon cable from the backbox on to the inner door and connect it
to the left unoccupied socket on the ACC DKC. Secure the ribbon cable to the inner
door using the cable clamp provided.
Emergency microphone cable

Connect the Emergency microphone cable to the socket P11 labelled 'microphone' on
the bottom edge of the ACC board. Secure the microphone lead to the 'P' clip on the
backbox.
Connect the 14-way

Secure 14-way ribbon to Inner door
ribbon to socket
using cable clamps supplied.
ACC DKC.
Connect microphone cable

to socket P11 labelled
microphone on the ACC
and secure cable to the P clip.
43
The following procedures assume the Control panel is installed, with cables terminated at the
backbox.
Open the Outer door of the enclosure using the door key supplied and then open the
inner door.
Mains terminal block

with fuse
NVM hardware link P13
Cards and internal cables of the panel

Master Control
Board (MCB)
KEYBOARD INDICATORS AND DISPLAY

24V 0V
TX1 RX1 0V TX2 RX2
L1 0V L2 0V
0V MIPNC C NO
Audio Control Card (ACC)
MA1+ MA1- MA2+ MA2-
BGM
R
24V
KEYBOARD
PB15
WARNING
REMOVAL OF COVER
PB6
PB14
PB10
PB9
PB11 PB7
P15
24V
AUDIO
LOOP 2
O/A O/B I/A I/B
AUDIO
LOOP 1
PA MIC2
PA2 PTT2 0V O/A O/B I/A
0V
P10
P14
P12
I/B
P13
Power Supply Unit

(PSU)
N
MA1 - FS1 250mA
FS3 200mA
P1
PA MIC 1
B A PTT 0V
PB8
P2
L
P2
MA2 - FS2 250mA
CARD 2
DANGER
FS3 3.15A(T)
Mains fuse
CARD 1
TE5 1A0
FS2
TE5 1A0
FS1
AUDIO LOOP 1
FIRMWARE BACKUP
BGM MPG MIC PA
The NVM can be enabled or disabled by setting the hardware

link P13 k on the MCB. If the NVM protect is hardware
disabled then it is possible to software enable or disable the
NVM using the [Protect] option under the [Setup] menu at the
panel.
Unprotect: Normally during commissioning the NVM is disabled
(unprotected) and writing to NVM is allowed.
AUDIO LOOP 2
IC3
IC16
LD1
P6
0V L1- L1+
0V L2- L2+
P13
P2
Warning
P16
AUDIO 1
BATT3
P2
P1
P4
P7
BAT1
AUDIO 2
FS6 43V
1A TE5
FS4 24V - 1A TE5

FS1 Bat 1- 3.15A TE5
SW2
MODE
P13
NVM Protect - [Disabled]
P13
NVM Protect - [Enabled]
SW1
RESET
Audio Control Card

Controls and indicators
Battery
BATT3
The lithium battery s is disconnected on leaving the factory by means of an insulation disk over the top
connector. The insulation disk must be removed before powering up the system.
Remove Sleeve
Setting the Rotary switch SW2

This switch is set to the required position for the panel build on leaving the factory. Before installing the Loop and Network cards onto
the MCB ensure the rotary switch j SW2 is set to an appropriate setting if it is used as a replacement panel in an existing system.
Firmware in socket IC3 of MCB
Applicable setting of switch SW2 on MCB
2211-148
2211-146
2211-136
2211-127
44
Protect: Once the configuration is backed up to the NVM, the

hardware link must be placed in the enabled position to disallow
writing to the NVM.
P3
MICROPHONE
P11
Remove
insulation disk
Loop Card 1
Removal of
cover exposes
live parts
DANGER
P4
SW1
RESET
Network Card
Loop Card 2
P2 -SMT
P9
P9
SW2
MODE
PB1B
P1 -SMT
P3
POWER
SUPPLY
P12
PP2
PB1A
Installing the Cards

The MCB can accommodate two Loop Cards. One Loop card
l can be fitted into the slot labelled CARD1 and the other Loop
card n into the slot labelled CARD2.
"
A networkable system has a Network Card m

fitted into the slot CARD 2 on MCB and additionally the
Network Card can accommodate the second Loop card.
Earth Link lead
The earth link lead o is supplied with the Network Card. This
link must be fitted to the spade connector on the top edge of
MCB with the other end to the spade connector on the Network
Card.
Terminals
The terminal blocks p on the top edge of the MCB are used for
wiring external fire system circuits. The terminal block q on the

top edge of the PSU is used for wiring the mains supply to the
panel. The connector r located on the bottom edge of the PSU
board is used to connect the batteries. The terminals on the top
edge of the ACC
are used to connect to the audio circuits.
Terminals on the Audio Control Card
PA
24V
AUDIO LOOP 1
AUDIO LOOP 2
O/A O/B I/A I/B O/A O/B I/A I/B
PA MIC 1
B
PA1 PTT1 0V
Descriptions of ACC terminals
P12
P14
Description
P13
FOR FUTURE USE
These terminals accept the connection of background

music, for example pre amplified output of an amplifier.
24V, B, A, PA1,
PTT and 0V
These terminals accept the connection of a microphone for

PA application.
PA2, PTT2 and 0V
These terminals are for future use to accept the connection

of a second microphone.
O/A, O/B, I/A and

These terminals accept the audio loop circuit connections.
I/B (for Audio loop 1 Here the 'O' in O/A and O/B signify output, while the 'I' in
and 2)
I/A and I/B signify input. There are two audio loops and
these are Audio loops 1 & 2. If the second audio loop is
not being used then it must be linked out.
PA2 PTT2 0V
P10
BGM
P15
PA MIC 2
BGM
R
24V
P15
PA MIC 1
B A PTT 0V
P10
P14
AUDIO
LOOP 2
O/A O/B I/A I/B
AUDIO
LOOP 1
PA MIC2
PA2 PTT2 0V O/A O/B I/A
0V
P12
I/B
P13
How to link out an

audio loop if it is
not being used
O/A O/B I/A
I/B
Terminals
TE5 1A0
FS2
AUDIO LOOP
TE5 1A0
FS1
AUDIO LOOP 1
BGM MPG MIC PA
AUDIO LOOP 2
Message card
with Audio Pack
LD1
P6
P1 -SMT
P3
P2 -SMT
P9
P9
P4
AUDIO 1
MICROPHONE
P11
P2
P4
AUDIO 2
45
Descriptions of MCB terminals
Terminals on the Master Control Board
NC C NO NC C NO
PB11
AUXILIARY RELAY 2
L1 0V L2 0V
L1 0V L2 0V
PB7
LOOP 1
TX1 RX1 0V TX2 RX2
0V MIPNC C NO
PB6
RS-232
PB9
MONITORED INPUT
and CLEAN CONTACTS
MA1+ MA1- MA2+ MA2-
24V 0V
TX1 RX1 0V TX2 RX2
PB15
KEYBOARD
PB15
REPEAT
INDICATOR
RS-485
PB6
L1 0V L2 0V
PB14
PB10
24V, 0V, B and A
These terminals accept the connection of a repeat indicator panel

(Port 0). The power terminals may be used on a Network node to
supply BACnet Gateway card.
NC, C and NO
Aux 1 - 2-sets
Aux 2 - 1set
These are auxiliary relay contacts. The auxiliary relay 1 is factory set
as a normally de-energised relay that operates with any fire event.
The auxiliary relay 2 is factory set as a normally energised relay that
operates with any fault event.
0V, TX, A, RX & B
These are terminals for RS232 or RS485 (Ports 1 or 2 respectively).
MA1+ MA1- MA2+ MA2-
PB8
PB8
MASTER ALARMS
L1, 0V, L2, 0V

These terminals accept the connection of system devices on a
(Loop 1 and Loop 2) two-wire loop that starts at L1 and ends at L2. Devices that can be
connected on the loop circuit include addressable fire
sensor/sounders, manual call points, interface units repeat/mimic
panels and micro and mains distributed amplifier units
MA1+, MA1-, MA2+
and MA2-
These terminals can accept two master alarm circuits that can operate
24V conventional alarm devices.
0V and MIP
These are monitored input terminals that can accept the connection of
a switch. An active input will trigger Command build 250.
NC, C and NO
(clean contact)
These are voltage free relay contact outputs that operate with a fire
event.
Pre power up checks
MA1 - FS1 250mA
FS3 200mA
P1
0V MIPNC C NO
PB9
PB11 PB7
24V
MA2 - FS2 250mA
CARD 2
P2
IC3
CARD 1
Loop Card
FIRMWARE BACKUP
IC16
POWER
SUPPLY
P12
P13
PB14
LOOP 2
Description
NC C NO
PB10
AUXILIARY RELAY 1
24V 0V
Terminals
P16
SW1
RESET
Master Control Board
BATT1
Ensure the following external circuit cables are left disconnected at this stage of commissioning:
loop circuits
Audio circuits
clean contacts
auxiliary circuits
master alarms (the 10K Ohm end-of-line resistor is fitted to inhibit a fault indication).
Monitored input (the 10K Ohm end-of-line resistor is fitted to inhibit fault indication).
&
Ensure the mains cable to the panel is securely connected to the mains terminal
block on the Power supply unit (PSU).
Ensure all cards are securely fitted into their appropriate slots on the MCB.
Ensure all ribbon cables are securely fitted into their respective sockets.
46
Battery Installation
A battery lead supplied in the spares pack must be fitted to the Power supply board,
connector P7 labelled Bat1. Next install the batteries inside the enclosure, which
requires removal of battery brackets from the backbox and then installation of the
batteries in correct orientation, standing on the small side with terminals at the top
facing outwards. Secure the batteries by refitting the battery brackets.
Switch On the mains supply to the panel and then make the connection to the battery.
&
Always use the recommended replacement battery. As there is a risk of

an explosion if incorrect batteries are used.
PSU
P3
43V
FS6
1A P7
BAT1
PSU BOARD
Y1 Y2 G1
PANEL
24V FS4 - 1A
Panel with doors open
The panel makes use of sealed lead acid type batteries which can have a
useful life of 5 years or more from the date of manufacture. It is strongly recommended
that batteries are replaced after 4 years of use. All batteries must be disposed of as per
recommendation made by battery manufacturer.
Bat1 - FS1 - 3.15A
Battery lead connects

to PSU board P2 Bat1
"
- +
Black
- +
Battery brackets
secured with two screws
Battery brackets
secured with two nuts
Red
- +
2 - 12V 12Ah battery
47
Mains supply

from consumer unit
&
Hazardous voltage remains after operation of a protection fuse. Take

appropriate action to guard against the risk of equipment having exposed live
mains supply.
230V ac
Audio LEDs
5A Unswitched fused
spur unit
AUDIO LOOP 1
BGM MPG MIC PA
PANEL
The Audio LEDs on the ACC card are associated with Audio Loop 1 and
Audio Loop 2, to indicate when the audio is active. When the background
music, centrally stored message held on the message store card (these
include attention tones), emergency microphone and/or PA microphone
is active then the respective LED is lit.
AUDIO LOOP 2
Under normal condition the MIC LED is lit, this is a 'park' position.
N
When the emergency microphone is used and on pressing the PTT button the attention tone will
sound, so the MPG LED is lit briefly before the MIC LED is lit again for live announcements.
P2
FS3 3.15A(T)
Mains fuse
DANGER
PSU Indicators
As for Vigilon Compact, see page 38.
PSU link
&
Ensure the mains supply cable enters the panel through a dedicated
cable entry point.
External printer
"
These fire alarm system products are NOT designed to be powered from an IT
Power system.
All mains powered equipment must be earthed. Mains supply to any fire alarm control and
indicating equipment must be via a dedicated unswitched 5A fused spur unit, which should be
clearly labelled FIRE ALARM - DO NOT SWITCH OFF.
A disconnect device must be provided to disconnect both poles and must have a minimum gap of
3mm. The 'disconnect device' should be available as part of the building installation and must be
easily accessible after installation is complete.
48
How to configure the monitored input

How to configure the buttons U1 and U2

How to configure LEDs CB253 and CB254

How to check and set the audio signal
Factory settings
Jack sockets
An EN Vigilon Compact VA Control panel has the following factory settings:
There are two stereo 3.5mm jack sockets on the Audio Control Card labelled Audio 1 and Audio 2.
A standard low impedance headphone may be plugged into the each jack sockets to listen to the
audios. Any audio from the panel that is outputted can be listened to using the headphones.
PANEL
ACC BOARD

AUDIO 1
Sector 1 is assigned to all ten voice alarm zones

AUDIO 2
Port settings
P0 - RS485, Baud: 1200 Mode: Repeat

The VU (Volume Unit) meter provides an indication of the signal level of audio being sent to the two
audio loops. For an optimum setting of audio the deflection on the VU meter must not exceed 0dB. P1 - RS232, Baud: 38400, Mode: Standard
VU Meter
large signal
The noise level remains constant for all input signals. If the input signal is low as read on the VU
meter then noise level will be more noticeable.
P3 - USB
small signal
Addresses
Noise
remains
constant
irrespective of
signal level
Domain address - 1 for EN panel

Where an amplifier of a music system provides an adjustable pre-amplified output, the adjustment NVM protect
must be such that the heavy beat of background music does not cause the pointer on the VU meter Software 'write' allowed (NVM protect - disabled)
to deflect above 0dB, in the red range.
The actual volume settings of background music, PA and VA to the speaker circuits are held at the
micro-DAUs and Mains powered DAU in the system. The settings of these volume levels are made
to site specific requirement using the commissioning tool.
49
Indications on power up
These are typical power up indications given at the Vigilon, Vigilon Compact and Vigilon Compact
VA panels with no loop circuits connected.
"
At this stage of commissioning the audio loop circuit of Vigilon Compact VA panel only
must remain disconnected.
Indications on power up
Switch On the mains power to the panel and connect the battery supply:
the panel buzzer sounds
some LEDs on the panel will be momentarily lit
a message is displayed.
Powering up - please wait
........
the dots below the powering up message indicates progress.
the Disablement light gives a flashing indication and after a short duration change
to a steady indication.
the display gives messages similar to:
Time not set
NVM Card Fitted
Audio Card Keypad fitted -(Compact VA only)
NVM is not write protected
Card found at Card 1 x.xx (aa/bb/cc)
Allocating Loop n
ACC Loop O/S 2
NVM Card - Non Volatile Memory Card found
Card 1 - Loop card 1 found
Card 2 - Loop card 2 found, this message will only appear if an optional loop card
is fitted in CARD 2 a slot of the Master control board of Vigilon compact or
compact VA only.
the x.xx is the software version number of the card
the aa/bb/cc signifies the day, month and year of software release.
Allocation: OK at Card X : Nothing found
There may be other indications and messages depending on the panel condition.
Disablement indicator is lit.
50
Initial tests
"
The menus at the control panel are accessible by pressing the Menu On/Off
button. For details of the menu options see Appendix A - Menu Maps .
Display test
To test the display press the Menu On/Off button and then select [Test/Eng] ->[Disp
Test]. The Display Test option will cause all the LEDs and buzzer (including
backlight) to remain On for a short duration.
Setting the Clock
To set up the time and date, press the Menu On/Off button and then select [SetUp]
-> [Usercode]# ->[Set Clock]. The Set Clock option will allow the setting of the time
and date at the panel.
Printer test (if fitted)
To test the printer, press the Menu On/Off button and then select [Control] ->
[Usercode]# -> [Printer], if the printer is On select [Test] to carry out a printer test.
Power supply test
Test the panels mains and battery supply by carrying out temporary disconnection
and reconnection, to allow event indications to be given on the panel. Ensure
sufficient time is given for the event to be displayed, normally within 2 minutes.
Master alarms circuit tests
Check that indications are given when there is a fault on the master alarm circuit.
Carry out an open circuit test by disconnecting the end of line resistor. Then carry out
a short circuit test by shorting the master alarm circuit terminals.
The menu maps of all the menu options that are accessible at the control panel are detailed in
Appendix A.
Panel Buzzer
It may be necessary during commissioning to disable the panel buzzer. It is possible
to selectively switch the disablement, fault, fire and supervisory buzzer sound to Off
or On. It is important to ensure that the buzzers are switched On for normal operation
after commissioning.
Press Menu On/Off button and then select [Test/Eng] -> [UserCode]# and select
<etc> [Config], [Buzzer] this will allow selection of [Disable], [Fault], [Fire] or
[Supervis] and then select [On/Off] and [Enter].
"
There is no indication given at the panel of buzzer disablement.
Software version check

The software version of the panel can be displayed by viewing the status of the master control
board / Main control card.
To check the software on the Master control board / Main control card: Press Menu On/Off button
and then select [Info], momentarily press <etc> to select [Status] -> [Card] and enter Card
number 0, which is the Main control board / Master control card and then select [Enter]. The
display will show software version number and date of release.
Password or PIN code
"
The terms Password, PIN (Personal Identification Number), Usercode and

Access code mean the same and are used interchangeably.
A password restricts access to the controls available to the user at the Control panel.
There are three access levels to the controls. These are access level 1, 2 and 3.
The Access level 1 controls only allows cycling through of multiple fire events messages on the
screen using the two buttons on the outer door.
Access level 2a is for the CUSTOMER. Here the person responsible for the system
can access the 'essential controls' by opening the panel outer door using a key
Access level 2b is for the CUSTOMER. Here the person responsible for the system
can access essential controls and some configuration menus using the panel door key
plus a customer PIN.
Access level 3 is for the ENGINEER. Here the person responsible for the system can
access essential controls and all system menus using the panel door key plus Engineer
PIN.
Daily PIN
There is another password that changes daily, which is available to the servicing
organisation. This daily password provides the same access to controls as the
Engineers' PIN. The daily PIN is only used when the Engineer's PIN is not known.
Useful menu options
Useful menu options
"
Always make a note of the Customer and Engineering PINs once they are
created. Ensure the Customer PIN is passed on to the person responsible for the fire
alarm system on the site.
51
How to create an Engineer PIN
"
All Vigilon panels leave the factory with no Engineer PIN code (Access level 3 code).
Therefore, on first power up there is an open access to all the Access level 3 menus.
The menu options under the Engineer PIN provides access to access level 3 controls that can alter
the configuration of the system.
To create or change an existing Engineer PIN:
(You will need to be at Access level 3 if an Engineer PIN is already set up.)
Press the Menu On/ Off button and select [Test/Eng] ->[UserCode]# -> then
momentarily press <etc> to select [Config] -> [New Pass] and then type a new PIN
or change an existing PIN and press the Enter key.
# - will appear if a PIN is already setup.
It is recommended that the PIN is at least 4 numbers and no greater than 15 numbers
for Vigilon compact and Vigilon Compact VA panels. The Vigilon panels can use
numbers and letters in the password code.
How to change the Customer PIN
"
All the Vigilon range of fire panels with MCC/MCB at V4.43 or greater are
automatically set up with a FACTORY DEFAULT CUSTOMER PIN: 2 2 2 2, once an
Engineer PIN is made active.
The Customer PIN provides access to access level 2 restricted menu options that cannot alter the
configuration of the system. To change a Customer PIN:
You will need to be at Access level 2.
Press the Menu On/Off button and then [Test/Eng] -> [UserCode] -> enter the
existing Customer PIN and select [Enter], select [New Pass] and then type a PIN of
less than 15 characters in length and press the Enter key.
It is recommended that the PIN is at least 4 numbers and no greater than 15 numbers
for Vigilon compact and Vigilon Compact VA panels. The Vigilon panels can use
numbers and letters in the password code.
How to erase a PIN
Password or PIN code
The Engineer or Customer PIN can be erased. To erase the PIN of either Customer or Engineer
level you will need to be at the respective access level.
Press the Menu On/Off button and then [Test/Eng] -> [UserCode] -> enter the
existing Customer PIN/Engineer PIN and select [Enter], select [New Pass] and then
just press the Enter key, this will erase the PIN. If the Engineer PIN is erased then
Customer PIN is also erased giving open access to all the menus.
52
Address allocation with Loop circuit end 1 connected
Address allocation
&
Always power-up the panel with the mains supply first and then
connect the battery. The power-down sequence should be in the reverse order.
11
10
12
Spur on main loop

Main
loop
circuit
30
Spur
on
main
loop
31
29
Spur
on
main
loop
28
22
Previous
27
26
13
23
24
25
14
21
20
15
19
18
It is recommended that each external circuit is wired up to the terminals at the panel, one circuit at
a time and tests conducted to ensure that each circuit is functioning correctly. We start by
connecting End 1 of the loop only.
Ensure end-2 of the loop cable remains disconnected.
Switch ON the mains and battery supply to power up the panel, you will initially see
END 1
32
Ensure the panel is first powered down before connecting the external
loop cables to the panel.
17
16
Next
Note: The End 2 connection is

not made at this stage of commissioning
CONTROL PANEL
the powering up messages. If there are no device 'address allocation' faults the panel
will start the loop.
Allocating Loop n
Allocation: OK at Card X : Allocated Y
Starting Loop n
Loop started OK at Card X: Started Y
Even if all the devices are wired correctly and there are no allocation faults, there may
still be some device faults. The panel fault buzzer will sound and the Fault LED will
be lit.
To stop the local buzzer from sounding press the Cancel Buzzer button.
"
In practice there may be system wiring and hardware faults during the address
allocation stage, these faults are also displayed as messages, for further information on
what they mean and possible action that can be taken, see Appendix B - Message action.
How addresses are allocated to devices on the loop

Each device connected to a loop circuit is allocated a software address on a sequential lowest
unused value basis. The allocation of addresses starts from one End of a loop circuit in a numerical
order. If both ends of the loop circuit are connected then the allocations of addresses start from
End1. On reaching a T-breaker the devices on the spur circuit are allocated addresses. On
completion of allocation of addresses to the spur circuit the process continues along the main loop.
53
Address allocation
&
Allocation faults
During allocation of addresses to the devices connected to a loop circuit there may be faults
detected and these are displayed at the panel accompanied with LED indications.
Allocation : HW Fault Card x number y Loop z
Allocation : Tx Fault Card x number y Loop z
Allocation : Double Allocated Card x number y Loop z
Allocation : Map Error at Card x number y Loop z
An allocation fault that has been rectified will not be recognised until after
Address allocation with Loop circuit End 2 connected
&
Before changes are made to the wiring inside the panel first power-down the
respective loop circuit.
Disconnect End 1 of loop 1 and connect the End-2 of the loop and power up to
commence reallocating of addresses to devices on the loop, this time from End 2.
Ensure addresses are allocated to all the devices on the loop.
re-allocation of the loop.
A loop with allocation faults will not be able to distinguish between a point type
On completion of this test, power down the loop and connect both ends of the loop
and ensure addresses are allocated to all the devices on the loop from End 1.
sensor and a call point.
When a short circuit fault is found on allocation of addresses, the loop re-allocates
Repeat these tests on the other loops if fitted.
addresses to the device before the short circuit. The device loop breaker remains open
and the device LED is lit.
During start up
A loop is started after allocation. Each device is set up to start operating normally
based on its type, when the analogue channels are read.
Typical starter fault
ASCII Device is Faulty, number X Loop Y
The above fault will only be displayed if repeat / mimic panel is powered up.
Address allocation
How to re-allocate addresses to a loop circuit

It is possible to selectively commence the process of address reallocation to devices on a loop
circuit.
Press the Menu On/Off button and then [Test/Eng] -> [UserCode] ->type your
password if one is set up and then select [Loop] ->[Allocate], now enter the CARD
number of the loop circuit and select [Enter].
"
After successful allocation of addresses to all the devices on a loop, the new
loop map is checked against the last map on the NVM, if found to be different then a
warning indication is given.
54
SAFE Addressing
To SAFE address a device
Press Menu On/Off button and then [Set Up] -> [Usercode]# and then momentarily press <etc>
A SAFE address is an address given to a device during commissioning, the value of which is stored to select [Set Up] and then again momentarily press <etc> to select [Device], now type in the soft
address of the device and then select [Loop], now type in the loop number on which the device
in the non volatile memory within the electronics module of the device, the SAFE address is
resides and then select [Safe] and finally type in a safe address and select [Enter].
therefore carried with the device.
A SAFE address can be given to any device on a loop circuit:
Individually
in a consecutive range or
to all the devices on a loop circuit.
"
It is possible to SAFE address devices using the commissioning tool. If SAFE

addressing a range of devices, it is quicker to do this using the controls at the panel.
To convert from SAFE to soft address

If for any reason the SAFE address given to a device is not required and the device needs to be
converted for soft addressing, then:
SAFE Addressing
Press Menu On/Off button and select [Set Up] -> [Usercode]# and then momentarily press <etc>
to select [Set Up] and then again momentarily press <etc> to select [Device], now type in the
SAFE address of the device and then select [Loop], now type in the loop number on which the
device resides and then select [Safe] and finally types in 0 for the safe address and select [Enter].
This will convert the device back to soft addressing mode.
55
To find devices on a loop circuit
Checking a loop map

It is possible to display or print a loop map.
Checking physical location of devices on a loop map is made easier by having two people in
communication with each other. While one person walks around the site and marks the devices on
the as fitted wiring drawings, the other person operates the panel controls.
The 'find' device is a function that gives visual or audible indication at the respective device on a
loop circuit. The following procedure assumes no password access is required.
Press the Menu On/Off button and then [Info] -> [Display]/[Print], note print will
Press the Menu On/Off button and then [Test/Eng] -> [Usercode] ->[Loop] ->[Find
A loop map is checked against the as fitted wiring drawings. This will confirm the exact location of
each system device and its address.
Dev], now enter CARD number n of loop circuit n, select [Start] and type in a device
only appear if a printer is connected to the panel. Momentarily press <etc> to select
number (usually device 1 if starting from the beginning) and then select [Enter]. The
[Loop Map] (note the menu is different if a network card is fitted in the panel as
display shows the device and loop number:
there will be a [Net Map] option), type in a loop number and select [Enter]. The loop
Number
1 on Loop 1
map is either displayed or printed, a typical example is shown below.
Press [Next] to find the next device on the loop and at any stage if the previous device
needs to be found then select [Previous].
A found device will provide visual or audible indication.

Map information for Loop 2
Os Prev Next
Common
1 End1
2
2
1
3
3
2
4
4
3
9
L2
5
5
4
6
6
5
7
7
6
8
15:45
Position
Main Loop
Main Loop
Main Loop
Spur Loop
Spur Loop
Spur Loop
Spur Loop
Sounders and S-Cubed
Each system alarm sounder on S cubed or S-Quad device will provide an audible and
/ or visual indication for 0.5 second On and 0.5 second Off repeated.
Mains powered DAU and micro DAU
Address of next device
Checking a loop map
S-Quad Sensors and MCP

A fire sensor or system manual call point will operate its LED for 0.5 second On and
0.5 second Off repeated.
A Mains powered DAU will switch On an LED located on the main board, which
changes from blink to 1s on 1s off when it is found.
Address of previous device
Address of the device
Where the device is

located, either on the
main or spur loop
Interface units
Ensure the outputs are not connected to external equipment at this stage of
commissioning.
Each interface output will in turn be activated for 0.5 second On and 0.5 second Off,
this process will repeat.
Panels on loop circuits
A mimic and repeat panel on a loop circuit will display its device number.
56
NVM Hardware Write protect

Hardware 'write protect' on a Vigilon 4/6 loop panel
New Vigilon
4/6-loops panel
Protected
- Write protected
Unprotected
- NOT write protected
(factory setting)
Backplane
IC2
IC1
P13
"
Where the system is required to be EN54 Part 2 compliant, then the link
P13 must be left in protect enabled position, that is to disallow write to NVM, on
completion of system commissioning.
123456
LCC
The link header P13 on the Backplane provides hardware 'write' protection and will stop
[Save] and [Back-up] commands from the panel controls modifying the memory. The link is
factory fitted to allow card data to be saved to the NVM.
TERMINALS
FOR CARD IN LOOP 5
P13
LK1
P13
P13
Write protected
Backplane
NOT Write protected

(factory setting)
Hardware 'write protect' - Vigilon Compact & (VA) panels

New Master Control Board (MCB) - networkable
24V 0V
TX1 RX1 0V TX2 RX2
KEYBOARD
PB15
PB6
L1 0V L2 0V
PB14
PB10
PB8
MA1 - FS1 250mA
FS3 200mA
P1
MA2 - FS2 250mA
CARD 2
P2
OLD Master Control Board (MCB) - non networkable
MA1+ MA1- MA2+ MA2-
PB9
PB11 PB7
24V
0V MIPNC C NO
P15
CARD 1
P10
P11
P6
P7
P14
24V
FS3 200mA
P1
P9 P8
MA2 - FS2 250mA

MA1 - FS1 250mA
CARD 2
P2
Non Volatile Memory (NVM)
Do not attempt to write protect using the link P13 while a back up
to the flash chip or initialisation of the memory is in progress.
12345678
P11
&
Older Vigilon
4-loops panel
TERMINALS
FOR CARD IN P8
P10
The NVM is located inside the panel on the Backplane of Vigilon panel and on the
Master Control board of Vigilon Compact (VA) panels. The NVM should hold the
latest system configuration data.
KEYBOARD
CARD 1
FIRMWARE BACKUP
IC16
BATT1
POWER
SUPPLY
P12
SW2
MODE
P13
CODE
PRINTER
IC3
POWER
SUPPLY
P12
IC3
P16
BCKUP
IC16
P16
P13
SW1
RESET
SW1
BATT3
Insulation Disk
Non Volatile
Memory NVM
'Hardware' NVM protect link P13 is factory set to NVM protect disabled
NVM protect - [Disabled]
(ie NVM unprotected,
that is write allowed)
NVM protect - [Enabled]

(ie NVM protected,
that is write not allowed)
There is also 'software'NVM

protect enable and disable,
see menu maps.
57
NVM Software - 'write protect' and 'unprotect'
To back up loop data to NVM
To 'software' write protect NVM
A fully allocated loop should be backed up to the Non Volatile Memory (NVM). The following
procedure assumes no password access is required and write protect is disabled.
Press the Menu On/Off button and then [SetUp] -> [Usercode]#, momentarily press
<etc> to select [Backup] and select the loop number n to be backed up to the NVM.
Select [NVM card] ->[Enter].
# - will appear if a PIN is setup, if so enter a PIN.
A confirmation will be given on the display:
Loop card n Backed up
Checksum written to card 14
Once the NVM is protected, it is not possible to 'write' or 'backup' card data to NVM. To write
protect to NVM:
<etc> to select [Protect] and then select [Enable] ->[Enter].
NVM is write protected at card 14
To 'software' write unprotect NVM
"
Once the NVM is unprotected, it is possible to 'write' or 'backup' card data to the NVM. To write to
NVM:
It is also important to back up data held in Card 0 (MCC), to do this carry out
above procedures except after the [Backup] command enter 0, which signify card 0.
<etc> to select [Protect] and then select [Disable] ->[Enter].
A confirmation will be given on the display and the warning light may be illuminated: To recover loop data from NVM
NVM is not write protected at card 14
On power-up the information stored on the Non Volatile Memory is automatically
recovered to the Local Controller (MCB) and Loop processor cards.
If there is a recovery failure you will get the following message:
Recovery failed at card x
It is possible to recover data previously backed up to Non Volatile Memory.

<etc> to select [Recover] and select the card number n to be recovered from the Non
Volatile Memory. Select [NVM card] ->[Enter].
Loop card 1 Recovered
"
A warning will be given if the loop map is different to that previously backed
up to the memory (NVM). For information on how to 'hardware' write protect NVM, see
page 57.
58
How to electrically erase the NVM
&
Under normal circumstances erasing the NVM is not necessary as

there is only one back up of the complete system configuration data held at the
panel. The NVM Initialisation should only be performed by a trained and qualified
engineer, as executing this command will erase all the data backed up at the
panel.
"
To completely erase the NVM you will first need to switch On the freeblock and
disable the hardware and software write protect. This will allow access to the
initialisation command.
To switch On freeblock
The following procedures assume no password access is required.
Press the Menu On/Off button and then [Test/Eng] -> [UserCode]# momentarily press <etc> and
select [Test] and then select [Freeblock], press [Next] for controller and select [Enter], which will
display numbers on the top left of the display to show the freeblock is On.

To initialise the Non Volatile Memory
The following procedures assume no password access is required.
Press the Menu On/Off button and then [Test/Eng] -> [UserCode]# and then select [Card] ->
[Init NVM] and then [Enter]. The following confirmation message will be displayed:
NVM Card Being Initialised NVM card 14 : 512K bytes
To switch Off freeblock
Press the Menu On/Off button and then [Test/Eng] -> [UserCode]#, momentarily press <etc> and
select [Test] and then select [Freeblock], press [Previous] for Off and select [Enter]. On
completion do a display test to clear the freeblock number display.
59
Loop circuit tests
Loop short circuit test
A loop short circuit isolation test should be carried out at this stage. It is recommended that the
The loop circuit tests involve checking the loop circuit resistance, capacitance and then carrying out sounders are switched On before conducting this test.
open circuit, short circuit and break tests.
Loop resistance and capacitance
LOOP CABLE
Power down and disconnect both ends of the loop 0V wiring at the control panel,
whose resistance and capacitance are to be measured.
Resistance
Using a multimeter measure the resistance between the loop 0V (End 1) and loop 0V
(End 2). In practice this should not be greater than 13 ohms for 1Km cable ONLY.
Dependent on the number of devices on a loop circuit over 1Km cable length ONLY,
an allowance can be made for contact resistance of up to 10mW per device.
Over 1Km cable length ONLY:
Worse case measured loop resistance:
having 50 devices
no greater than 13.5 ohms
having 100 devices
no greater than 14 ohms
having 200 devices
no greater than 15 ohms
PANEL
enclosure
BOARD
TERMINALS
Check the loop cable screen to loop 0V resistance this should be an open circuit.
Capacitance measure
Typically where alternative allowed loop cable types are being used then a measured
capacitance between the loop 0V and cable screen should practically be no be greater
than 0.21uF. However the Loop Driver is capable of driving a higher capacitance.
Loop circuit tests
How to [Repair] a loop circuit

When a loop circuit is tested for open or short circuit fault or if a genuine wiring short or
open circuit fault should occur, then rectification action must be taken. To rectify the
fault, remove the fault and process the repair command at the control panel.
L1
0V
SHORTING LINK
End 1 Short test

Create a short circuit by wiring a link across the loop terminals at End-1. There
should be no loss of any part of the system. The display should read:
Wiring changed - short at card x number y loop z
Wiring changed - loop split
After rectification (removal of the short circuit) you will need to [Repair] the loop
circuit.
a.
Press the Menu On/Off button and select [Test /Eng].
b.
Select [Usercode] and if a password access is required, type in the PIN and A short circuit test should then be repeated at End-2 and again at mid point of the
End 2 and Mid circuit Short test

press the Enter button.
c.
60
loop.
After rectification (removal of the short circuit) you will need to [Repair] the loop
Select [Loop] and then momentarily select <etc> until [Repair] appears on
circuit.
the display, select [Repair] and type in the loop circuit you want to repair, for
example loop 1or 2 and then select [Enter].
Ground break test
Positive line break test
A ground break test should be carried out at this stage:

Disconnect the 0V line from End-1 of a loop circuit.
Disconnect the +ve loop connection at one End of a loop circuit.
LOOP CABLE
REMOVE THE 0V
LINE TO
INTRODUCE A
GROUND BREAK
A positive line break test should be carried out at this stage:

L1 (+ve)
LINE
GROUND
BREAK
TEST
LOOP CABLE
PANEL
enclosure
PANEL
enclosure
BOARD
BOARD
TERMINALS
L1
"
TERMINALS
0V
L1
A single 0V line break should not cause the loss of any part of the system.
0V
The display should read:

Wiring changed - split at card x number y on loop z
"
Loop circuit tests
End 1 cable break test

The cable break may have to be sustained for up to a minute. The display should read:
A single +ve line break should not cause the loss of any part of the system.
Wiring changed - ground break at card x number y on loop z
To clear the fault, the 0V line should be reconnected and then the loop should be
Reconnect positive (+ve) line to clear the fault.
repaired using the [Repair] function at the panel.
Repair the loop using the [Repair] function the panel.
End 2 loop break test
The ground break test should be repeated at the other end of the loop circuit, End-2
and again at Mid point of the loop.
"
The exact location of a ground break is not indicated at the panel, however the
loop will run as normal.
To clear the fault, the 0V line should be reconnected and then the loop should be
repaired using the [Repair] function at the panel.
61
Earth fault test
Type of earth fault

Interrogate the [PSU] readings in the [Test/Eng] menu to establish the type of Earth fault.
Earth fault tests should be carried at this stage:

L1 (+ve)
LINE
EARTH
FAULT
TEST
LOOP CABLE
0V (-ve)
LINE
EARTH
FAULT
TEST
Type of Earth fault
Earth (Ear) reading
No earth fault
around 60
+ve line and earth
greater than 75
-ve line and earth
less than 40
At the end of the test operate the [Repair] function at the panel.
PANEL
enclosure
10K
resistor
BOARD
TERMINALS
Loop circuit tests
L1
0V
L1
0V
0V-line earth fault test

Connect the 0V line to the earth of the control panel enclosure. This may have to be
sustained for up to 1 minute for the fault to be detected. The display should read:
Earth Fault
On restoration of normal conditions the display should read:
Earth Fault cleared
+ve line earth fault test
Now connect the +ve line to earth via a 10K ohm resistor. This may have to be
sustained for up to 1 minute for the fault to be detected. The display shows an Earth
fault message as above and after restoration a cleared message.
"
If the resistance between Earth and Loop +ve is in the order of a few ohms
then this will be registered as a short circuit.
62
To list the STATUS of a device on an allocated loop at the Control Panel: Press Menu On/Off
button and then select [Info], momentarily press <etc> to select [Status] -> [Device], enter the
device number, select [Loop], enter the loop number n on which the device resides, select [Enter]
to view device status information.
Monitored Input / LED is
attached to the device
Loop on which
the device is installed
Loop breaker
condition
C:closed
Status of End 1
of the device
(high or low)
Location of the
Status of End 2
device on the loop
of the device
(high or low)
Device description
Loop 1 No.
7 Dual optical/Heat/CO
LED)
LB1:C
End1:Hi
End2:Hi
I/O:...0 Anal:1-4,6
2nd:250 3rd:0 Short delay:0
Zone 1 Zone 1
Tertiary address
used primarily by
sounders/strobe
Zone number and label
Secondary address
denotes group of devices
Digital
Input outputs
Short circuit delay

associated with
number of T breakers
off T breakers
Analogue channels
used
1:Optical (forward)
2:Heat
3:Gas
4:Optical (Backward)
5:Sounder/Strobe/Speech fault
6:Monitored line or LED
0 - Output, I - Input and . signify - not used

Device
digital I / 0
channels
S-Quad Heat Sensor
. . .0
S-Quad Heat Sensor Sounder
.000
2, 5
S-Quad Dual Optical Heat

Sensor
. ..0
1, 2, 4

Sensor Strobe
0..0
1, 2, 4, 5

Sensor Sounder
.000
1, 2, 4, 5

Sensor Speech Strobe
0000
1, 2, 4, 5

Sensor CO
. . . 0
1, 2, 3, 4, 5

Sensor CO Speech Strobe
0000
1, 2, 3, 4, 5
S-Quads
+ Monitored input
+ Monitored output
Checking device STATUS
Analogue Channel 1 is forward scatter optical smoke sensor

Analogue Channel 2 is heat sensor
Analogue Channel 3 is for CO gas sensor
Analogue Channel 4 is for backward scatter optical smoke sensor
Analogue Channel 5 reports sounder/flasher/speech faults to the control panel
Analogue Channel 6 reports monitored input/monitored output faults to the control panel
Beam transmitter
. . .0
Beam receiver
. . .0
1- raw data
2- average data
MCP
. . .0
Repeat panel
. . .0
Zonal mimic
. . .0
63
Device
digital I / 0
channels
Mimic panel
. . .0
T-breaker O/S
. . .0
Loop interface
all possible
I - input
0 - output
"
The correct device type may not be displayed if the loop circuit has allocation faults.
1-channel 1
2-channel 2
3-channel 3
4-channel 4
5
Interface unit (mains powered)
all possible
I - input
0 - output
1-channel 1
2-channel 2
3-channel 3
4-channel 4
5-battery
6-mains
S cubed
0000
1 - IR control
2 - Tone
3 - Power
4 - Strobe
Check that the device is of the correct type and is suitable for the area in which it is
installed.
Check the digital status of all devices.

On successful allocation check that the total number of devices found equals the
number installed. Also note there will be a loop voltage on the unconnected end of the
cable.
The products below are listed for reference

Slave LED
. . . 0 +L
Sounder
.00.
3 - Low freq.
2 - On/Off
Repeat sounder
. 00 .
Optical
. . .0
Optical heat
. . .0
1,2
Heat
. . .0
Slave Relay
0 . . 0+R
Single channel interface unit
I0.0
1,2,5
Loop powered zone module
I . .0
1,5
Optical/Heat Sounder
.000
1,2
64
Typical new Time average values
Device checks
"
Ensure all dust covers have been removed from the sensor heads and the
system is allowed to operate for at least 24 hours to obtain accurate time average and
condition code readings.
Checking the time averages
Device type S-Quad
Analogue Channels
Typical
Time average
Tnew
Heat Sensor
2 - heat
66
Heat Sensor Sounder
2 - heat
66
Dual Optical Heat Sensor
1 - optical (forward)
2 - heat
4 - optical (backward)
25
66
40
Dual Optical Heat Sensor Strobe
2 - heat
25
66
40
Dual Optical Heat Sensor Sounder
2 - heat
25
66
40
Dual Optical Heat Sensor Speech

Strobe
2 - heat
25
66
40
Dual Optical Heat Sensor CO
2 - heat
3 - CO
25
66
25
40
Dual Optical Heat Sensor CO

Speech Strobe
2 - heat
3 - CO
25
66
25
40
23:15
Average Channel 1 Device 1 Loop 1
19 252 252 252 252 252 19 19 19 19 18 18
Foreground (fast) Time

average readings T1 to T5 of
Channel 1 Device 1 loop 1
Tnew
On
demand
e Aver channel 1 Device 1 Loop 1

[Repeat]
[Previous]
[Next]
Foreground (fast) time average readings

T1
T2
T3
T4
80mS
320mS 1.28S
5.12S
T5
20.48S
[Cancel]
Normally reads 252, unless there is a threshold.
Tnew
On
demand
Background (slow) time average readings

T6
T7
T8
T9
T10
T11
1.36min 5.46min 21.84min 1.45hr 5.82hr 23.3hr
Time average Tnew

200 - 235
180 - 210
180 - 210
0
150 - 170
Device checks
Time average readings of Channel 1 device 1 loop 1
Background (slow) Time

average readings T6 of T11
Channel 1 Device 1 loop 1
Analogue Channel number

1
2
2
Channels and time average values
Press the Menu On/Off button and then [Info], momentarily press <etc> to select [Time Avg] and
type in the required channel number from the range 1-6 whose time average is required, select
[Device] and type in the device number, select [Loop] and type in the loop number of the device
->[Enter]. The display shows time averages for the device.
Tnew (On demand)
Device type 34K

Optical
Heat
Heat
Beam Transmit
Beam Receive
65
Exceptions
/Condition codes
Checking the Exception/Subfault codes

'Exception' (EN) or 'Subfault' (BS) are condition codes and these codes provide information about
a sensor device. A code indicates small changes in the environmental condition, sensor
mechanism and how the sensor performs in the system. To ensure that the sensor exception
codes are meaningful, all existing codes must be cleared and the system left undisturbed for at
least 24 hours.
Code definition
There are ten different conditions possible for each sensor type, although not all of them are
defined. Each condition code has a range of 0-3.
Code Meaning
0
This condition is OK. This code is not displayed unless another non
zero code exists.
1 or 2 Suggests preventive maintenance is required, where necessary, to

avoid possible false alarms.
3
The sensor is faulty. A fault condition indication is given at the control

panel. A message reading Sensor Out of Specification is displayed.
A CODE 3 is automatically disabled by the system to prevent false alarms.
Time and date when Exceptions or Condition codes were read
Time: 15:54.07 Fri 20 December 2002
Exception
Number 2 on Loop 1
condition 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
23:15
Location of the device

residing on this loop
whose exceptions are
shown.
These condition codes
indicate the device is
probably disconnected
Device checks
10th - position
0 - position
For definition of these codes see the table
To view the exception/condition codes of a device

Press to select Menu On/Off button and select [Info] -> <etc> -> [Event] -> <etc> ->
[Exception] -> [Enter]. To view all the currently active exceptions on the system use the next and
previous menu options to scroll through.
How to clear 'Exceptions'
This can be done by removal and replacement of the sensor chamber, by re-allocation of the loop
having the sensor or, by using [Clear] function at the panel:
Press Menu On/Off button to select [Test/Eng] -> [Usercode]# -> <etc> -> [Config] -> [Clear]->
[Exception] -> [Enter]. Note cleared codes will return if the conditions are still true.
# - Enter your PIN if one is programmed.
66
Meaning
Action
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 or This is the sub-fire band and No action need be taken.

0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 or if set as shown it should be
taken as showing that the
1100000000
sensor is at its optimum
sensitivity for its location.
2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 or A sub-fire has been
0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 or generated which would
suggest that the sensor was
2200000000
either too sensitive for its
environment or that the
sensor type may be
incorrect for the location.
Action should be to check

location and alter sensor
state or type as required.
This should only be done
with the knowledge of the
customer. Remember to
re-backup all changes to
states onto the NVM.
0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 or These codes indicate that

the sensor is in a windy
0020000000
location. This will cause the
chamber voltage to drop.
Code Level 1 shows one
drop only, Level 2 shows
greater than one drop.
The location should be

checked and a change in
siting made, if required.
Note: Wind will not cause
the sensor to false alarm.
0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 or This shows that the sensor

0 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 or time averages are close to
0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 or acceptable limits.
0000020000
On commissioning the
sensor should be replaced.
A sensor with code 2 is
worse than code 1. On
maintenance sensors with
code 2 should be replaced.
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 or
0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 or
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 or
0000000200
This shows that high

frequency noise events have
been detected by the
system. A code 1 shows one
event and a code 2 shows
more than one event.
The device should be

replaced. On maintenance,
sensor with code 2 should
be replaced. If it reoccurs
then check the
environment.
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 or This shows device hardware The sensor should be

faults. 1-fault code 1 and
replaced.
0000000020
more than one fault code 2.
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 or This shows that
transmission faults are being
0000000002
noted. Code 2 is worse than
code 1.
The device should be

replaced. If it reoccurs
then check the
environment.
Condition Codes for S-Quads (Exception / Sub Fault codes)
E
N
V
I
O
R
N
M
E
N
T
S
E
N
S
O
R
D
E
V
I
C
E
Pos.
No.
Description
Optical subfire
Normal
band
0
None
Heat subfire
Gas subfire
1
Small signal sensed
[Check location, state & type]
Subfire
None
Small signal sensed

Subfire
Small signal sensed

Subfire
Fault band
Optical/Gas channel drift or out of

range
OK
Heat channel drift or out of range
OK
Optical/Gas channel noisy

(High freq)
OK
Single HF noise event

detected
Multiple HF noise seen

(Check location and report)
Heat channel noisy (High

frequency)
OK
Single HF noise event

detected
Multiple HF noise seen

(check location and report)
device firmware
OK
Isolated fault
Repetitive fault
[Note / report / replace]
Total failure
[Replace]
10
device transmission
OK
[Note/report]
Low error rate
Medium error rate

[Report]
High error rate

[Replace]
Close to acceptable limit
Out of limits
[Clean/replace]
Out of limits
[Clean/replace]
Device checks
Gen
type
Condition codes
Sub fault band
67
Pre Fire, Fire and Super fire

Definitions
Condition
PreFire
Fire
..and for State 0 it implies
Fire detection is at a higher sensitivity than the selected STATE.
Fire detection that will easily pass the respective EN54 test.
Fire detection at the sensitivity of the selected STATE.
Fire detection that is referenced to the respective EN54 test.
Fire detection at lower sensitivity than the selected STATE.
Fire detection that will not pass the Standards test.
Pre Fire, Fire and Super fire
SuperFire
meaning..
68
S-Quad Sensor STATES

The STATE in which the S-Quad sensors operate can be changed from the default factory set STATE to another STATE during commissioning. The environment in which the S-Quad device is installed
will determine what STATE is applicable. # - Default STATE ~ EN54 : Part 7 :2000 * EN54 : Part 5 :2002
&
The release of control panel software (MCC/MCB equal to or greater than V4.41):
If a non defined STATE is selected during commissioning then the control panel will revert to STATE 0.
The previous release of control panel software (MCC/MCB less than V4.41):
If a non defined STATE is selected during commissioning then the control panel will revert to STATE 15, which means the device is functionally switched OFF.
Device LPCB approved STATE
Meets ~ EN54 : Part 7 :2000

* EN54 : Part 5 :2002
Dual Optical & Heat sensor variant (With Strobe)

(With Speech)
(With Strobe & Speech)
(With Sounder)
S4-711 State 0 #
S4-711-ST State 5
S4-711-VO
State 8
S4-711-ST-VO
S4-771

Medium optical smoke ~ / Class B heat *
Delayed medium optical smoke ~ / Class A1 heat*
S4-911 State 0 #

Class A1 heat *
(With Speech & Strobe)
Dual Optical, Heat & CO sensor variant -
Optical & Heat sensor variant S4-710 State 0 #

S4-770
(With Sounder)
Medium optical smoke / Class A1 heat*
Heat sensor variant (With Speech & Strobe)

(With Sounder)
Optical senor -
S4-720 State 0 #
S4-780
State 0
S4-715
Class A1 heat *
Class B heat *
Medium optical smoke
# - factory default STATE

All S-Quad range of sensor sounder devices meet CEA GEI 1 - 084 Requirements and test methods for input/output devices for use on the transmission paths of fire detection and alarm systems.
69
S-Quad Heat sensor STATES

Sensitivity
State
Definition / Class
Application in / Suitable for:
a-high- to-e-none
State 0# Class A1 heat
Area having high levels of smoke, dust or steam
State 13 Class A2 heat
Area where there is moderate temperature changes plus dust, smoke or steam present
State 5
High temperature Class B heat
Area having high ambient temperature plus dust, smoke or steam present
State 6
High temperature Class BS heat - with

no rate of rise component
Area where there is rapid temperature changes plus dust, smoke or steam present
State 15 No detection
S-Quad Dual Optical & Heat / Optical & Heat sensor STATES
Sensitivity
State
Definition / Class
State 3
High sensitivity optical,

Class A1 heat
Clean area or environment, where early detection is required
State 4
Medium sensitivity with no optical spike General area as State 0 with less immunity to steam and dust to facilitate witness test
protection, Class A1 heat
a-high- to--j-none
a
b
State 0# Medium sensitivity optical, Class A1

heat
General area
State 8
Delayed medium sensitivity optical,

Class A1 heat
General application in area with transient steam, dust or smoke present
State 5
Medium sensitivity optical, Class B heat Area having high ambient temperature with low dust, smoke or steam present
State 2
Low sensitivity optical, Class A1 heat
Areas with moderate dust, smoke or heat during working hours when used with timing function
State 11 Low sensitivity optical,

Class B heat
Area having high ambient temperature, plus where moderate dust, smoke or steam present
State 6
Area having high ambient temperature that changes, plus moderate dust, smoke or steam
present
Area where smoke, dust or steam occurs at times
Low sensitivity optical,

Class BS heat
State 12 Class A1 heat only

70
S-Quad Dual Optical, Heat & CO sensor STATES

Sensitivity
State
Definition / Class
State 1
High sensitivity optical, Class A1 heat,

high sensitivity gas
Clean area or environment where early detection is required with false alarm reduction
State 4
Medium sensitivity optical with spike

protection, Class A1 heat, medium
sensitivity gas
General area as State 0 with less immunity to steam and dust for ease of testing using artificial
smoke in normal operating mode, when test / commissioning mode is not active
State 0# Medium sensitivity optical,

Class A1 heat, medium sensitivity gas
General area where false alarm reduction is required for comprehensive fire detection
State 2
Medium sensitivity optical,

Class A1 heat, low sensitivity gas
Applications with moderate dust, smoke (tobacco) or steam
State 9
Medium sensitivity gas,

Class A1 heat
Area where high levels of smoke, dust or steam is often present
State 11 Medium sensitivity optical,

Class B heat
Area with high ambient temperature, plus low levels of dust, smoke or steam present
State 12 Class A1 heat only
Area where smoke, dust, steam or gas occurs at times
a-high- to-h-none

Sensitivity
State
Definition / Class
State 3
High sensitivity optical
Clean area or environment, where early detection is required
State 4
Medium sensitivity with no spike

protection
General area as State 0 with less immunity to steam and dust to facilitate wittiness test
State 0# Medium sensitivity optical
General area
State 8
Delayed medium sensitivity optical
General area with transient steam, dust or smoke present
State 2
Low sensitivity optical
Area with moderate dust, smoke or steam present
a-high- to-f-none
71
S-Quad Optical sensor STATES
Beam sensor STATES
States verses distance

Sensor STATES
Ideal range
minimum to maximum
4 or 5
2m to 30m
2 or 3
5m to 100m
0 or 1
12m to 100m
State
Definition
Application
State 0#
Default
detection
A fire is detected when there is a 50% (3dB) fall in signal level, however if the fall is by 90% (10dB) in less than
1second and is maintained for 40 seconds, then a fault is registered. This allows the Control panel to differentiate
between a fire and a fault signal caused by accidental obscuration.
State 1
Normal
sensitivity
A fire is detected when there is a 50% (3dB) fall in signal level, however if the fall is by 90% (10dB) in less than
1 second and is maintained for 40 seconds then a fire is registered.
State 2
Medium
Sensitivity
A fire is detected when there is a 25% (1.3dB) fall in signal level, however if the fall is by 90% (10dB) in less than
1 second and is maintained for 40 seconds then a fault is registered.
State 3
Medium
Sensitivity
1 second and is maintained for 40 seconds then a fire is registered.
State 4
High Sensitivity
1 second and is maintained for 40 seconds then a fault is registered.
State 5
High Sensitivity
1 second and is maintained for 40 seconds then a fire is also registered.
State 15
No detection.
This is a total disablement of the sensor.
72
34000 range of sensors STATES (for reference only)
&
The previous release of control panel software (MCC/MCB less than V4.41)
If a non defined STATE is selected during commissioning then the control panel will revert to STATE 15, which means the device is functionally switched OFF.
Optical heat sensor (plus sounder) STATES (34000 range)

These STATES cover the following sensors:
Optical & heat sensor
Optical & heat sensor plus sounder
Heat sounder
For the Heat sounder product range ignore the Optical STATES.
STATES
Definition
Application
State 0 (LPC approved)
Heat Grade 2
Optical smoke normal sensitivity
Suitable for most applications. Provides smoke detection to meet BS5445:Part 7 and
provides heat detection to meet Grade 2 as defined in BS5445:Part 5.
State 1
High sensitivity optical

Grade 2 heat
Used in areas or situations where airborne smoke or dust is unlikely to occur and therefore
a more sensitive detection is available.
State 5
Medium sensitivity optical only
Where high ambient temperatures of greater than 40oC are expected in the detection area.
Medium sensitivity optical with

20 seconds time constant
Grade 2 Heat
This state is useful in hotel bedrooms where low levels of signals could occur for short
durations. If smoke and heat occur simultaneously, the time delay is effectively overridden
to provide fast detection.
State 10
Medium sensitivity optical with time

delay (20 second time constant) or
Grade 2 heat
Similar performance to state 8 but without the time delay overridden. Useful in hotel
bedrooms and loading bays where low levels of signals may occur.
State 11
Low sensitivity optical

Grade 3 Heat
Used for smoke detection in areas where airborne particles or smoke is normally present,
or high temperatures (up to 40oC) can be normally attained.
73
The release of control panel software (MCC/MCB equal to or greater than V4.41):
If a non defined STATE is selected during commissioning then the control panel will revert to STATE 0.
STATES
Definition
Application
Grade 1 Heat only
Grade 2 Heat only
No optical smoke detection. Can be used where airborne particles or smoke could occur
briefly or at specific times. Optical detection can be used in conjunction with time
blocks/slots to enable/disable sensor depending on application.
State 14
Grade 3 Heat only
State 15
No detection
This state can be used to provide total disablement on a timed or temporary basis.
Heat sensor STATES (34000 range)

STATES
Definition
Application
(Default) Grade 2, rate of rise and

fixed temperature
Suitable for general use in ambient temperatures up to 40oC. Provides detection to

Grade 2 performance as defined in BS5445 : Part 5.
Grade 1, faster rate of temperature

rise as well as fixed temperature
Applicable for areas with normally very steady low ambient temperatures. A faster rate
of rise can signal a fire below the normal set temperature at 58oC.
State 2
Grade 1, limited rate of rise
Applicable for normal ambient temperature where temperature variations are expected
up to 40oC but faster response than grade 2 is required e.g. hotel bedroom.
State 5
High temperature with rate of rise
Provides detection as specified by Range 1 BS5445:Part 8 .
State 6
High temperature with no rate of rise
Provides detection as specified by Range 1 BS5445:Part 8.
State 15
No detection
No detection. This is a total disablement of the sensor.
74
4 - Channel Interface Unit STATES

These 4 - channel interface unit input STATES are applicable for both mains and loop powered
interface units.
Single channel interface input STATES
STATE
Definition
Applications
These STATES also apply to loop powered single channel interface.
State 0
Default - all Inputs enabled
Normal use
Selective disablement and
enablement of interface input
circuits
STATE
Definition
Application
State 1
Input 1 disabled
State 0
Default - all
Inputs enabled
Normal use
State 2
Input 2 disabled
State 1
Input 1 disabled
Selective disablement and

enablement of interface input circuits
State 3
Inputs 1 and 2 disabled
State 4
Input 3 disabled
State 5
State 6
State 7
Inputs 1, 2 and 3 disabled
State 8
Input 4 disabled
State 9
State 10
State 11
Input 1, 2 and 4 disabled
State 12
State 13
State 14
State 15
All inputs disabled
Where an input circuit is used for fire

detection application, the call points
on the circuits will NOT remain
operational on disablement of the
circuit.
State 15
All inputs
disabled
Interface input disablement
"
Where an input
circuit is used for fire
detection application, the
call points on the loop
circuit will remain
operational on disablement
of the loop circuit.
Interface Unit STATES
Interface Unit STATES
interface input disablement
75
Installed equipment tests

Preparation
Check to ensure access will be provided to areas where installed equipment is to be
tested, such as locked or secure areas.
Ensure all sensor dust covers are removed from sensor devices.
Tests may be made easier by having: sensor extractor tool, smoke poles, smoke
canister, heat gun, beam obscuration filter, sensor removal kit and MCP test key, plus
keys to open system equipment. Where applicable read the instructions supplied with
the test kit.
Communication to site occupants

Before undertaking any of these tests and to prevent unnecessary building evacuation,
Zone 'Test' mode

The Zone Test mode is applicable for EN Vigilon 4/6-loop panel, Vigilon Compact panel and Vigilon
Compact VA panel only and is used when testing devices in a zone. It allows the engineer to test
zones without having to return to the panel to silence alarms and reset the system.
While the panel is in the Zone test mode, following a fire event the alarm sounds for 5 seconds and
then automatically performs the silence alarm sequence and thereafter a panel reset. The panel
inhibits the operation of delay block functions, network functions, auxiliary and clean contact relay's
operation in this mode.
All zones of the system that are not in test mode will operate normally.
To put the control panel into or out of the 'zone test mode': Press Menu On/Off
button and select [Test/Eng] -> [UserCode] and enter the Engineering password, this
need only be done if an Engineering password is set up. Press <etc> and select [Test]
and then select [Zone] and [On] / [Off]. Now enter the zone
number and select [Enter]. Test
"
ensure:
On completion of all tests switch Off the [Test] mode and notice the 'Test'
all affected personnel on the site are informed, via a responsible person that the
indicator also switches Off.
fire alarm system is being commissioned.
where there is a link to an alarm receiving centre, the appropriate action should be
taken to ensure they are informed that tests are being carried out on the system.
'Commission' mode
Commissioning Tool
It is much easier for the panel and system to be configured from the Commissioning tool, see the
Commissioning tool manual.
Plant equipment
"
Prior to any functional tests being carried out on the system, all plant
equipment should be isolated.
Tests should be carried out following customer consent. It may also be necessary to
obtain third-party consent depending on the plant equipment connected to the panels
auxiliary contacts.
All the tests on plant equipment should be as agreed during the project design stage.
76
The Commissioning mode is applicable for BS Vigilon 4-loop panels only. It places all the zones of
the system into test state.
The 'Commission' mode may be used when testing the system. It allows the engineer
to test devices without having to return to the panel to perform silence alarms and
reset. While the panel is in the Commissioning mode, following a fire event the alarm
sounds for 5 seconds and then automatically performs a silence alarm sequence and
thereafter a panel reset.
To put the control panel into or out of the 'commissioning mode': Press Menu On/Off
button and select [Test/Eng]. Select [UserCode] and enter the Engineering password,
this need only be done if an Engineering password is set up. Press <etc> and select
[Commission] and [On] Commission
"
On completion of commissioning, switch Off the [Commission] mode and

notice the 'Commission' indicator also switches Off.
Interface Units
&
&
2. Manufacturer recommended test equipment and methods must be used to fire

test flame detectors connected via interface unit.
2. Ensure the contact rating of interface output circuits are adequate for the
ancillary equipment load requirement.
4. When smoke testing fire sensors using artificial smoke, avoid excessive spray
to prevent accumulation of sticky residue on sensor, see instructions on the
smoke canister. Ensure the 'Test mode' is used when performing smoke test on
an S-Quad sensor
Tests should be carried out on the operation of plant equipment, like lift, escalator,
1. When testing heat sensors DO NOT use a heat gun for the test in a hazardous
environment.
5. The beam sensors should be tested using obscuration filters to simulate

smoke at the appropriate sensitivity STATE.
The BS5839:Part 1 recommends that all sensors are tested for correct operation.
Unless otherwise instructed all sensors should be tested. Each Sensor should also be
checked for any physical obstacles that would inhibit the operation of the sensor in
the event of a fire.
Each Sound and Speech part of the S-Quad and S-Cube should output the correct
signal at the appropriate volume level in accordance with the Standard requirements
and to meet the site specific needs as agreed with the customer.
The Strobe part of S-Quad and S-Cube should operate at the required flash rate in the
event of a fire and is not obstructed.
Each S-Quad fire sensor should be tested for correct operation in the event of fire.
Each speech/sounder should be tested for correct operation in the event of fire.
Manual Call Points
Each call point should be tested for correct initiation of a fire event.
1. In some instances it may not be possible to functionally test input / output

circuits off an interface unit, such as when it is connected to plant equipment.
Plant equipment
door release, fire dampers etc following customer consent. It may also be necessary to
obtain third party consent.
All tests on plant equipment should have been agreed during the project design stage.
Tests
Where tests are applicable for the interface unit check each fault condition is
indicated at the control panel:
Battery disconnection*
Mains supply disconnection*
Input line open circuit
Input line short circuit
Input line detector and MCP fire#
Output line open circuit ~
Output line short circuit ~
Output line operation ~
* - not applicable for the loop powered interface units.
# - a fire from a call point or detector connected to an interface input cannot be differentiated.
Fire Sensors
Keyswitches
Where the input interface unit is via a keyswitch, then the keyswitches should be
configured for correct operation and tested as per project specification.
Check on operating a keyswitch the confirmation LED, where applicable, is lit to

show operation.
77
S Cubed
Repeat panel
"
The remote control is only operable when the panel is in the zone Test
mode (EN) / Commission mode (BS).
Sounder device
Wall
3m - maxim
Trouble shooting
If the remote control fails to operate in close
proximity to the thinned section of the Sounder
device, then a possible cause may be the
battery. Replace the battery.
um range
Thinned
section
on base
Remote Control
Red LED
Off
Flash
Steady On
+
Perform a short press on the
Power button
to turn On the remote control. The Red LED will
flash
x1 every 2 seconds
Press the function button to toggle between:

Volume function and note the Red LED flashes
x1 every 2 seconds
Tone function and note the Red LED flashes
x2 every 2 seconds
+ button to increase volume or to select the next tone
Press the
Press the
button to decrease volume or to select the previous tone
Note: The strobe light on the S-Cubed unit if fitted will flash rapidly when
the volume is being adjusted using the remote control.
Press and hold the
Power button to save the settings and adjustments.
The Red LED will remain On
whilst the button is held pressed.
The data is saved to the unit when the tone/speech on the S-Cubed unit
stops briefly. Release the button on the remote control and the
Red LED will switch Off .
78
Each repeat panel should be tested for the following:

System event messages and indications
Local fault events are displayed and logged, such as Battery and Mains supply disconnection
Alarm controls & Cancel Buzzer operation
Depending on the
Mimic Panel
type of S-Cubed
device being
commissioned check
to ensure correct
output sound tone,
speech message and
strobe rate are given.
The S-Cubed devices
should have been
setup using the
commissioning tool.
The volume of the
sounder S-Cubed
device can be
adjusted by using a
remote control.
Each S-Cubed should
be tested, for correct
operation in the event
of fire.
Each Mimic Indicator should be configured and tested for the following:
To confirm fires are indicated
Local fault events are displayed and logged, such as Battery and Mains supply disconnection
Lamp Test
On an A3 Mimic panel by pressing the button on the centre face of the unit
On an A2 mimic panel by operating the test key
On an A4 mimic panel by inserting a 2mm pin like object (for example a small terminal
screwdriver) into a hole located on the underside of the panel enclosure.
The sound levels in
Vigilon Compact VA system
the areas should be

tested in accordance
with the British
Standard
requirements and to
meet the site specific
needs as agreed with
the customer.
Mains powered DAU and micro DAU

Each Mains powered DAU and micro DAU should be configured and tested for the following:
Check to ensure correct output sound tone and speech message are given of fire events.
Adjust the volume out at speakers on the Speaker circuits using controls on the Mains
powered DAU in accordance with the British Standard requirements and to meet the site
specific needs as agreed with the customer.
Similarly volume level should be adjusted at each micro DAU to the required setting during
configuration.
A 'Fall back' test must be performed to ensure the central messages are announced. This is
achieved by stopping the two loops using the [Test/Eng] menu and then by conducting a
Sound Alarm from the panel. Restart the loop on completion of the test.
Deviations from standards

The results of system tests carried out must be in accordance with the relevant standards and
project specification.
Any deviations must be documented and reported for approval.
A Vigilon Compact network can consist of a number of control panels of standalone systems and
network nodes wired together in a secure loop.
Single Network
Each standalone system must first be fully commissioned individually.
Check that the correct cable is used to wire the network, the installer's manual lists all
the approved cables.
A secure loop is achieved by installation of a network card in each Vigilon Compact (VA) panel and
Vigilon Compact Network Node to facilitate the interconnection. Each standalone system is first
commissioned before being networked together with other panels and nodes.
The commissioning involves systematic introduction of each standalone system to the network and
tests to ensure the network is working.
side 1
RS485 - up to 1.2Km
Master Control Board (MCB)
side 1
Control panel
Network card (NC)

Loop processor card (LPC)
Secure
Network
Control panel
Network card (NC)

All panels in a networked system must operate at the same baud rate, normally this is
38.4K where copper network card is being used.
A network controller is a panel/node that can connects to a Central monitoring system.
side 2
side 2
"
Network card (NC)

RS485 -up to 1.2Km
The whole networked system is then configured and tested to ensure it works, with master sectors
and global controls operation to site requirements.
When setting the address switches on the 'network card', ensure the network controller
is given the lowest address.
Control panel
side 2
side 1
Control panel
RS485 - up to 1.2Km
side 2
Network card (NC)

Vigilon Compact Network
RS485 - up to 1.2Km
side 1

79
Wiring the single network
Single network without domain bridge

Vigilon Compact
Control panel
Cable screen
N/C = No connection
Network Card
N/C
N/C
PB1B
0V L1- L1+
PB1A
PB1B
Address 2
Baud 38.4K
Node 2
Connections for Network card in

Card 2
MASTER CONTROL BOARD
Cable screen
Node 3
Node 1
Network Card
Control Panel
Address 1
Baud 38.4K
Control Panel
Vigilon Compact
Control panel
Address 3
Baud 38.4K
PB1A

Card 2
0V L2- L2+
Network Card
0V L1- L1+
Vigilon Compact
Control panel
0V L2- L2+
Node 4
N/C
Vigilon Compact
Control panel
Network Card
Where a multicore cable is being

used ensure the unused cores
(cores without signal) are
connected to 0V.
The cable screen must
be connected to an earth
terminal in the backbox,
as shown.
80
N/C
0V L2- L2+
0V L1- L1+
PB1A
PB1B

Card 2
Control Panel
0V L2- L2+
0V L1- L1+
PB1A
PB1B
Address 4
Baud 38.4K

Card 2
Control Panel
Network Card for Vigilon Compact - baud and node address switch settings
&
The copper network card is factory set for 38.4K baud with node address 4.
Component side
Node address
Baud rate
64
8
off
7
off
6
off
5
off
4
off
3
off
2
off
1
off
2400
on
off
off
off
off
off
on
off
9600
off
on
off
off
off
off
off
on
19.2K
on
on
off
off
off
off
on
on
38.4K
off
off
on
off
off
off
63
on
on
on
on
on
on
Address
Baud
12345
on
off
- factory settings
678
81
Powering-up the Network
How to check a Network map
Add one panel at a time starting from the network controller (Node 1) at side 1.
Using the Menu On/Off -> [Info] -> [Map] -> [NetMap] option to enter the
"
network card address n.

It can take a few minutes for the system map to update.
For each panel powered-up the network controller will automatically try to establish
communication with the connected equipment.
The network controller will display the status of the network as being started, secure
or non-secure and from now on will monitor and control the network
communications.
Use disable comms to isolate a panel from the rest of the network, ie it operates at the
network card in an echo mode, select Menu On/Off -> [Control] -> [Disable] ->
[Comms] and enter the Network Card usually number 4.
The display will provide a list in cabling order the addresses of panels in the
networked system.
These are examples of different networks. The lowest address 1 has been given to
the network controller.
Map information for Network at card 10

Nodes on side 1
1 9 7 6 5
Nodes on side 2
1 3
This example shows the network is not secure
Map information for Network at card 10

Nodes on side 1
1 9 7 6 5 3 1
Nodes on side 2
1 3 5 6 7 9 1
This example shows the network is secure
82
How to check Network Card status
Errors
meaning
Using the Menu On/Off -> [Info] -> [Status] -> [Card] and enter the network card 4. The display
will confirm:
address of the network card
address of network controller
and a set of condition codes
Freeblock
Free memory blocks available to temporarily store messages

waiting to be processed. The maximum number = 199, although it
may drop as low as 175 - 180 on a highly populated network. A
lower value may indicate a high error value and will require
rectification.
Card 4 Is OK Fault 0:Disable 0:Warning 0

Address (0) Version 4.06 5/7/06
Node 3 Controller 1 Baud Rate 38400
Condition 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 1 198 199
Fault Finding
The communication path in a secure network will alternate between end 1 (side 1) and
end 2 (side 2) every minute.
The network will be non secure until the last panel is connected and powered-up.
High errors
Check cable lengths and type used.
Side 1
Side 2
Side 1
Parity/
Framing
error
Parity/
Framing
error
CRC
CRC
1 error = count of
10 but every 1sec
the counter is
decremented by 1
Side 2
Side 1
Timing
errors
Current
message
errors
1 error =
count of
100
Freeblock
UART
End
type communicating
1 or 2
Check
0-Rockwell
software
1-Phillips
2-Phillips SMT
Only appears
on Controller
Errors
meaning
Parity
Parity is incorrect, data corrupted.
Framing
8- bit transmitted incorrectly and the data line does not return to
logic 1 at the end of the transmission.
CRC
Cyclic redundancy code. When a message consisting of a number

of 8 bit transmissions is sent, a calculation is carried out to check
that data corruption has not occurred.
Time out
error
Where an 8 bit transmission block is not fully received, the

network card will time out ready to receive the next message.
Time out error will also be generated for each parity/ framing error.
Check wiring, connections and earthing arrangements. Check the network cable is
correctly earthed to the equipment.
Replace network card at point of failure.

Check the addresses and baud rates of the network cards of the networked panels.
It may be necessary to investigate and:
look at the noise voltage between conductors, screen and earth.
Side 2
"
Always reset the Network Card first when rechecking for errors, using
[Test/Eng] -> [Card] ->[Reset] -> Network Card 4.
On completion of the above the networked system may now be configured for network operation,
for master sectors and global controls to be actioned as per site requirements.
83
A Vigilon network consists of a number of control panels of standalone systems and network
nodes wired together in a secure loop using copper or fibre network cards.
Single Network
Each standalone system must first be fully commissioned individually.
Check that the correct cable is used to wire the network.
A secure loop is achieved by installation of a copper of fibre network card in each Vigilon panel and
Vigilon Network Node to facilitate the interconnection. Each standalone system is first
commissioned before being networked together with other panels and nodes.
side 1
Network card (NC) *

Loop processor card (LPC) x 4
side 2
RS485 - up to 1.2Km
Fibre optics - up to 2Km
Input output card (IOC)

Local controller card (LCC)
The commissioning involves systematic introduction of each standalone system to the network and
tests to ensure the network is working.
Control panel
side 2
Secure
Network
side 1
A network controller is a panel that can connect to a Central monitoring system.
RS485 - up to 1.2Km
Network card (NC) *

Spare
* - can be copper or fibre network card
side 2 RS485 - up to 1.2Km

side 1
Network Node
Single Vigilon Network
All panels in a networked system must operate at the same baud rate, normally this value
is 38.4K where copper network card is being used and 115.2K where Fibre network card
is used.
side 2
Network card (NC) *

Input output card (IOC) x 3 Opt.
side 1
Network card (NC) *

Loop processor card (LPC) x 4
Control panel
"
When setting the address switches on the 'network card', ensure the network controller
is given the lowest address.
The whole networked system is then configured and tested to ensure it works, with master sectors
and global controls operates to site requirements.
Central Monitoring
system
RS232
15m
max
RS485 - up to 1.2Km
Network Node
84
Wiring a Copper network

From
previous
panel
or node
Cable screen
To Next
panel
or node
N/C
No
connection
P10
Connections for
Network card in
Socket P8 (Card 6)
P10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
0V -ve +ve 0V I -ve +ve |
Connections for
Network card in
Socket P8 (Card 6)
Connections for
Network card in
Socket P8 (Card 6)
(post 08-2006) BACKPLANE
(post 08-2006) BACKPLANE
0V L2- L2+ 0V L1- L1+
Connections for
Network card in
Socket Card 2 of MCB
(Pre 08-2006) BACKPLANE
NEW Control Panel
NEW Control Panel
P10
OLD Control Panel
Compact Control Panel
Wiring a Fibre network
P4
Tx
P6
Rx
P5
Tx
P3
P7
Rx
P2
P4
Tx
Tx
Rx
P6
Rx
P5
Tx
P3
BACKPLANE
BACKPLANE
Control Panel
Control Panel
P7
Rx
P2
Side 2
(End 2)
Side 1
(End 1)
C8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Tx
Side 2
(End 2)
Side 1
(End 1)
C8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Rx
Links P2 and P3 are booster links.

Normally the links are not fitted, however for
distance exceeding 750m the links must be fitted.
4188-856_i4-1_08/09_Generic Vigilon (Compact + VA) Comms.
85
Single network without domain bridge
Powering-up the Network

Add one panel at a time starting from the network controller (the panel) at side 1.
Control panel
"
IO Card
all switches to
Off position
Network Card
For each panel powered-up the network controller will automatically try to establish
Address 2
Baud 38.4K
DKC
Address 1
Baud 19.2K
DKC
Address 1
Baud 19.2K
IO Card
all switches to
Off position
Node 1
Network Card
Address 3
Baud 38.4K
Node 3
Address 1
Baud 38.4K
Control panel
Node 2
Network Card
IO Card
all switches to
Off position
DKC
Address 1
Baud 19.2K
Control panel
Node 4
Using the Menu On/Off -> [Info] -> [Map] -> [NetMap] menu, enter the network
Network Card
IO Card
all switches to
Off position
DKC
Address 1
Baud 19.2K
communication with the connected equipment.

The network controller will display the status of the network as being started, secure
or non-secure and from now on will monitor and control the network
communications.
Use disable comms to isolate a panel from the rest of the network, ie it operates at the
network card in an echo mode, select Menu On/Off -> [Control] -> [Disable] ->
[Comms] and enter the Network Card, usually card 6.
How to check a Network map
Control panel
Address 4
Baud 38.4K
It can take a few minutes for the system map to update.
card address.
IO Card switches must be set to Off
position, The baud and address
switch settings are now located on DKC
On EN panels the DKC switches set the Domain
address, which must all be the same value
for a single network without domain bridge.
The display will provide a list in cabling order the addresses of panels in the
networked system.
These are examples of different networks. The lowest address 1 is normally the
network controller.
Nodes on side 1 of a SECURE NETWORK
1
10
4
24
3
6
2
22
23
Nodes on side 1 of a NON-SECURE NETWORK

1
10
4
24
3
6
Nodes on side 2 of non-secure network
1
23
7
22
2
86
How to check Network Card status
Errors
meaning
Using the Menu On/Off -> [Info] -> [Status] -> [Card] and enter the network card number, usually
card 6. The display will confirm:
address of the network card
address of network controller
and a set of condition codes
Time out
error
Where an 8 bit transmission block is not fully received, the

network card will time out ready to receive the next message.
Time out error will also be generated for each parity/ framing
error.
Freeblock
Free memory blocks available to temporarily store messages

waiting to be processed.
The maximum number = 199, although it may drop as low as
175 - 180 on a highly populated network. A lower value may
indicate a high error value and will require rectification.
Card 6 Is OK Fault 0: Warning 0

Network (0) Version 4.xx
30/04/04
Address 5 Controller 5 Baud Rate 38400
condition 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 1 198 199
Fault Finding
The communication path in a secure network will alternate between end 1 (side 1) and
end 2 (side 2) every minute.
The network will be non secure until the last panel is connected and powered-up.
Side 1
Side 2
Side 1
Parity/
Framing
error
Parity/
Framing
error
CRC
CRC
1 error = count of
10 but every 1sec
the counter is
decremented by 1
Side 2
Side 1
Timing
errors
Current
message
errors
1 error =
count of
100
Freeblock
End
UART
type communicating
1 or 2
Check
0-Rockwell
software
1-Phillips
2-Phillips SMT
Only appears
on Controller
Errors
meaning
Parity
Parity is incorrect, data corrupted.
Framing
8- bit transmitted incorrectly and the data line does not return
to logic 1 at the end of the transmission.
CRC
Cyclic redundancy code. When a message consisting of a

number of 8 bit transmissions is sent, a calculation is carried
out to check that data corruption has not occurred.
High errors
Check cable lengths and type used.
Check wiring, connections and earthing arrangements. Check the network cable is
correctly earthed to the equipment.
Replace network card at point of failure.
Check the addresses and baud rates of the input output and network cards of the
networked panels.
It may be necessary to escalate an investigation to:
look at the noise voltage between conductors, screen and earth.
Side 2
"
Always reset the Network Card first when rechecking for errors, using
[Test/Eng] -> [Card] ->[Reset] -> Network Card number, normally Card 6.
The networked system may now be configured for network commands to be actioned, such as
master sectors and global controls as per site requirements.
87
Star network using Domain bridge IO cards
Multiple Vigilon Networks

Domain Bridge using Input Output card
Two or more Vigilon networks can be connected together at domain bridge IO cards by having a
direct RS232 connection, Modems, Fibre Optics units or NPORT units. This allows the display of
events at any control panel/Network node in the connected networks.
If remote sites are

residential it is not
permissible to rely on
domain bridge link to
call fire brigade
Previous
Previous
Domain
1
Previous
Network Node
- 4 IOC Cards
- 1 Network Card
Two networks using Domain bridge IO card

Previous
xt
Next
Previous
Next
Next
Next
Next
xt
Domain
Bridge
Domain
Bridge
DOMAIN
BRIDGE
Domain
Bridge
Previous
Previous
Previous
Previous
Previous
Previous
xt
Next
IOC
RS232
15m max
IOC
Previous
IOC
Next
Next
Next
Next
Next
Domain
3
IOC
Domain
4
Previous
Previous
Previous
Previous
Previous
xt
Next
Next
Domain
2
Next
Previous
IOC
Next
xt
Next
Next
Next
Modem
Fibre
Optics
Computer
network
88
IO domain bridge network switch settings
Switch settings of cards inside

EN54 Vigilon panels / Nodes
where Domain Bridge IO Card
is used to network fire systems
IO Card
all switches to
Off position
Control panel
IO Card
all switches to
Off position
Network Card
Network Card
Address 2
Baud 38.4K
Address 2
Baud 38.4K
Domain 1
DKC
Address 1
Baud 19.2K
Domain 2
Control panel
Node 2
Control panel
Node 2
Network Card
Address 1
Baud 38.4K
Control panel
IO Card
DKC
Address 2
Baud 19.2K
all switches to
Off position
Domain Bridge
DKC
Address 1
Baud 19.2K
Node 3
IO Card
all switches to
Off position
Network Card
Address 1
Baud 38.4K
Node 1
DKC
Address 2
Baud 19.2K
Node 1
Node 3
Control panel
Network Card
Network card address is the Node address

Domain Bridge IO Card address is the Domain address
Address 3
Baud 38.4K
Baud rate settings must be set as shown.
Network Card
Address 3
Baud 38.4K
IO Card
IO Card
all switches to
Off position
all switches to
Off position
DKC
Address 1
Baud 19.2K
Control panel
IO Card switches must be set to Off,

these are now located on the DKC.
DKC
Address 2
Baud 19.2K
89
Message routing
Messages
to other
Network
Domains
The Main controller card

(Card 0) will accept all messages
from Master group 1 and route messages
to domains 2 and 3
via the network card (Card 6).
Message routing at Card 0

All events - 1
Domain 2 - Card 6
Domain 3 - Card 6
MCC

All events - 1
Domain accessed via LCC: 2,3
IOC
Domain
bridge

All events - 1
Domain accessed via LCC: None
--------------------------------
IOC
Domain
bridge

All events - 1
Domain 1 - Card 15
Domain 3 - Card 15
The Network card (Card 6)

will accept all messages
to and from Master group 1
domains 2 and 3 via
the local controller card (Card 0).

All events - 1
The Domain bridge IO card

(Card 15) has no need to
route messages
as there is nothing connected.

All events - 1
--------------------------------
NC
Control panel
Messages
from
the local
network
Messages
from other
Network
Domains
Zones 1
17
2
18
3
19
4
20
5
21
6
22
7
23
8
24
9
25
10
26
11
27
12
28
13
29
14
30
15
30
Delay
5
21
6
22
7
23
8
24
9
25
10
26
11
27
12
28
13
29
14
30
15
30
16
32
Fire
Verify
Vigilon Fire System

GENT 2004
Test
Verify
Vigilon Fire System

GENT 2004
Test
Disablement
Disablement
Sounder
Sounder
CB253
CB254
Previous
Next
Power
CB253
CB254
Previous
Next
Power
MCC
2
18
3
19
4
20
5
21
6
22
7
23
8
24
9
25
10
26
11
27
12
28
13
29
14
30
15
30
16
32
Fire
15:45
Control
panel
IOC
Domain
bridge
Verify
Power Fault
System Fault
Delay
Vigilon Fire System

GENT 2004
Test
Disablement
Sounder
CB253
Domain 1
Zones 1
17
Next
2
18
3
19
4
20
5
21
6
22
7
23
8
24
9
25
10
26
11
27
12
28
13
29
Fault
14
30
15
30
Zones 1
17
16
32
System Fault
Delay
2
18
3
19
4
20
5
21
6
22
7
23
8
24
9
25
10
26
11
27
12
28
13
29
14
30
Fault
Fire
Domain 2
16
32
Fire
Verify
Power Fault
Verify
Vigilon Fire System

GENT 2004
Vigilon Fire System

GENT 2004
System Fault
Sounder
Delay
Sounder
CB253
CB253
Test
Test
CB254
CB254
Disablement
15
30
15:45
15:45
Power Fault
CB254
Previous
Previous
Next
Previous
Disablement
Next
Power
Zones 1
17
2
18
3
19
4
20
5
21
6
22
7
23
8
24
9
25
10
26
11
27
12
28
13
29
14
30
15
30
Fault
16
32
Fire
15:45
Verify
Power Fault
System Fault
Delay
Vigilon Fire System

GENT 2004
Sounder
Test
Disablement
CB253
CB254
Previous
Next
Power
Power
Power
15
1
IOC
Domain
bridge
4
20
Power Fault
Fire
15:45
System Fault
Delay
Fault

All events - 1
Domain 2 - Card 15
NC
Control panel
Zones 1
17
2
18
3
19
4
20
5
21
6
22
7
23
8
24
9
25
10
26
11
27
12
28
13
29
Fault
14
30
15
30
16
32
Fire
15:45
Verify
Power Fault
System Fault
Delay
Vigilon Fire System

GENT 2004
Test
Disablement
Sounder
CB253

All events - 1
Domain 1 - Card 15
Domain 2 - Card 15
CB254
Previous
Next
Power
Domain 3 - Card 1
All events - 1
All events - 1
Domain accessed via LCC: 2

All events - 1
Zones 1
17
Zones 1
17
2
18
3
19
4
20
5
21
6
22
7
23
8
24
9
25
11
27
12
28
13
29
14
30
15
30
16
32
Fire
15:45
System Fault
Delay
Verify
Vigilon Fire System

GENT 2004
Test

All events - 1
Domain accessed via LCC: 3
--------------------------------
10
26
Fault
Power Fault
Disablement
90
3
19
15:45
16
32
System Fault
Fault
Power Fault
Zones 1
17
Messages to
the local
network
2
18
Fault
Zones 1
17
Sounder
CB253
CB254
Previous
Next
Power
2
18
3
19
4
20
5
21
6
22
7
23
8
24
9
25
10
26
11
27
12
28
13
29
Fault
14
30
15
30
16
32
Fire
15:45
Domain 3
Verify
Power Fault
System Fault
Delay
Vigilon Fire System

GENT 2004
Test
Disablement
Sounder
CB253
CB254
Previous
Next
Power

All events - 1
--------------------------------
Domain bridge message passing tests
Domain bridge using Fibre Optic network card
To check the domain bridge connections and to ensure messages

can be passed between networks the following must be done.
Trigger an event in a network, such as a fault.
Check the event is passed on to the connecting networks
and is displayed at the networked control panels.
Repeat the test at each network to establish message
passing between networks.
Finally back up the cards of the panel including the
Network card and IO card to the Memory card. This
ensures the panels of each network knows the location of
network controller, ie the domain bridge connection
point.
Up to 64 small Vigilon networks can be connected together in a secure loop by using domain bridge fibre optics network card
(VIG-NC-DOM-FO), with the card installed in socket P7 of the backplane. This allows the display of events at any control panel in
the connected networks.
Zones 1
17
2
18
3
19
4
20
5
21
6
22
7
23
8
24
9
25
10
26
11
27
12
28
13
29
14
30
15
30
Fault
16
32
Fire
15:45
Verify
Power Fault
Vigilon Fire System

GENT 2004
System Fault
Delay
Sounder
Alarms
Silenced
Test
CB254
Previous
Disablement
Zones 1
17
2
18
3
19
4
20
5
21
6
22
7
23
8
24
9
25
10
26
11
27
12
28
13
29
14
30
15
30
Fault
Verify
Vigilon Fire System

GENT 2004
System Fault
Delay
Sounder
Alarms
Silenced
Test
CB254
Previous
Next
Power
Network
domain bridge
Fire
15:45
Power Fault
Disablement
Next
16
32
Power
Zones 1
17
2
18
3
19
4
20
5
21
6
22
7
23
8
24
9
25
10
26
11
27
12
28
13
29
14
30
15
30
Fault
Fibre Optics Domain bridge network card

(VIG-DOM-NC-FO) installed in P7 of backplane
16
32
Fire
15:45
Verify
Power Fault
Vigilon Fire System

GENT 2004
System Fault
Delay
Sounder
Alarms
Silenced
Test
CB254
Previous
Disablement
Zones 1
17
2
18
3
19
4
20
5
21
6
22
7
23
8
24
9
25
10
26
11
27
12
28
13
29
14
30
Fault
15
30
16
32
Verify
Vigilon Fire System

GENT 2004
System Fault
Delay
Sounder
Alarms
Silenced
Test
CB254
Previous
Disablement
Next
Next
Power
Fire
15:45
Power Fault
Power
Panel/Node
Zones 1
17
2
18
3
19
4
20
5
21
6
22
7
23
8
24
9
25
10
26
11
27
12
28
13
29
14
30
Fault
15
30
Fibre optic
patch panel
Fibre optic
patch panel
Panel/Node
16
32
Fire
15:45
Verify
Power Fault
Vigilon Fire System

GENT 2004
System Fault
Delay
Sounder
Alarms
Silenced
Test
CB254
Previous
Disablement
Zones 1
17
2
18
3
19
4
20
5
21
6
22
7
23
8
24
9
25
10
26
11
27
12
28
13
29
14
30
15
30
Fault
Next
Power
Tx
Rx
16
32
Fire
15:45
Verify
Power Fault
Vigilon Fire System

GENT 2004
System Fault
Delay
Sounder
Alarms
Silenced
Test
CB254
Previous
Disablement
Next
Power
Zones 1
17
2
18
3
19
4
20
5
21
6
22
7
23
8
24
9
25
10
26
11
27
12
28
13
29
14
30
Fault
15
30
Tx
Rx
16
32
Fire
15:45
Verify
Power Fault
Vigilon Fire System

GENT 2004
System Fault
Delay
Sounder
Alarms
Silenced
Test
CB254
Previous
Disablement
Next
Power
Zones 1
17
2
18
3
19
4
20
5
21
6
22
7
23
8
24
9
25
10
26
11
27
12
28
13
29
14
30
15
30
Fault
16
32
Fire
15:45
Verify
Power Fault
Vigilon Fire System

GENT 2004
System Fault
Delay
Sounder
Alarms
Silenced
Test
Zones 1
17
2
18
3
19
4
20
5
21
6
22
7
23
8
24
9
25
10
26
11
27
12
28
13
29
14
30
15
30
Fault
CB254
Previous
Disablement
Next
Power
Fibre patch cable
16
32
Fire
15:45
Verify
Power Fault
Vigilon Fire System

GENT 2004
System Fault
Delay
Sounder
Alarms
Silenced
Test
Zones 1
17
CB254
Previous
Disablement
Next
2
18
3
19
4
20
5
21
6
22
7
23
8
24
9
25
10
26
11
27
12
28
13
29
14
30
15
30
16
32
Power
Fault
Fire
15:45
Verify
Power Fault
Vigilon Fire System

GENT 2004
System Fault
Delay
Sounder
CB253
Test
CB254
Previous
Disablement
Next
Power
Zones 1
17
2
18
3
19
4
20
5
21
6
22
7
23
8
24
9
25
10
26
11
27
12
28
13
29
Fault
14
30
15
30
16
32
Fire
15:45
Verify
Power Fault
System Fault
Delay
Vigilon Fire System

GENT 2004
Test
Disablement
Sounder
Alarms
Silenced
Zones 1
17
CB254
Previous
Next
2
18
3
19
4
20
5
21
6
22
7
23
8
24
9
25
10
26
11
27
12
28
13
29
14
30
15
30
16
32
Power
Fault
Fire
15:45
Verify
Power Fault
System Fault
Delay
Vigilon Fire System

GENT 2004
Test
Disablement
Sounder
Alarms
Silenced
CB254
Previous
Next
Power
Zones 1
17
2
18
3
19
4
20
5
21
6
22
7
23
8
24
9
25
10
26
11
27
12
28
13
29
Fault
14
30
15
30
16
32
Fire
15:45
Verify
Power Fault
System Fault
Delay
Vigilon Fire System

GENT 2004
Test
Zones 1
17
2
18
3
19
4
20
5
21
6
22
7
23
8
24
9
25
10
26
11
27
12
28
13
29
Fault
14
30
15
30
16
32
Disablement
Sounder
CB253
CB254
Previous
Next
Power
Fire
15:45
Verify
Power Fault
System Fault
Delay
Vigilon Fire System

GENT 2004
Test
Disablement
Sounder
Alarms
Silenced
CB254
Previous
Next
Power
The above diagram shows small fibre networks connected together by a fibre network domain. It is equally possible to mix small
copper networks and small fibre networks together in the manner shown above to a network domain.
91
FO Domain Network switch settings

Node 3
Node 2
Node 3
Node 2
Control panel
IO Card
all switches to
Off position
Domain3
IO Card
all switches to
Off position
Network DOM
Card
Address 3
Baud 230.4K
FO Network
DOM Card
Address 2
Baud 230.4K
DKC
Address 3
Baud 19.2K
DKC
Address 2
Baud 19.2K
Address 1
Baud 38.4K
IO Card
all switches to
Off position
Domain 1
Control panel
Domain 2
Control panel
all switches to
Off position
Network Card
Control panel
IO Card
Network Card
Network Card
Address 1
Baud 38.4K
Address 2
Baud 38.4K
DKC
Address 1
Baud 19.2K
Control panel
Network Card
Address 3
Baud 38.4K
IO Card
all switches to
Off position
DKC
Address 1
Baud 19.2K
Control panel
IO Card
all switches to
Off position
Network Card
Address 2
Baud 38.4K
DKC
Address 3
Baud 19.2K
Control panel
Network Card
Address 3
Baud 38.4K
IO Card
all switches to
Off position
DKC
Address 3
Baud 19.2K
Node 1
Node 1
Switch settings for Cards

inside an EN54 Vigilon panel
where a Fibre Optic Network Domain
Bridge Card is installed
FO Network
DOM Card
Address 1
Baud 230.4K
DKC
Address 1
Baud 19.2K
IO Card
IO Card
all switches to
Off position
DKC
Address 4
Baud 19.2K
all switches to
Off position
Network Card
Address 1
Baud 38.4K
Network DOM
Card
Address 6
Baud 230.4K
IO Card
all switches to
Off position
Domain 6
Domain 5
DKC
Address 5
Baud 19.2K
Node 3
Node 2
Network
Card
Address 1
Baud 38.4K
Network card address is the Node address

IO Card address is the Domain address
Baud rate settings must be as shown.
The FO Network DOM card switches must
be set to the domain address
DKC
Address 6
Baud 19.2K
Node 3
Node 2
IO Card
all switches to
Off position
Network Card
Address 2
Baud 38.4K
Control panel
Node 1
DKC
Address 6
Baud 19.2K
Network Card
Control panel
Address 3
Baud 38.4K
IO Card
all switches to
Off position
DKC
Address 6
Baud 19.2K
IO Card
all switches to
Off position
Network Card
Address 2
Baud 38.4K
Control panel
Node 1
DKC
Address 5
Baud 19.2K
Network Card
Control panel
Address 3
Baud 38.4K
IO Card
all switches to
Off position
DKC
Address 5
Baud 19.2K
92
Fibre Optics Network domain ring
Control panel
Network DOM
Card
Address 5
Baud 230.4K
Control panel
Network DOM
Card
Address 4
Baud 230.4K
Control panel
Domain 4
Appendix A-1 - Menu maps for EN54 (V4) Vigilon panels

The menu options [Control], [SetUp], [Info] and [Test/Eng] are accessible on pressing the MENU ON/OFF button.
Access level 1 No menus are accessible at AL1
EN Vigilon Control panel with MCC/MCB at

Access level 2a
V4.43 or higher
[Control] [Set Up] [ Info ]
[Control] Menu map 1
Access level 2a Menus accessible with panel door open

Access level 2b Menus accessible with panel door open and AL2 password
[ Test/Eng ]
Access level 3 Menus accessible with panel door open and AL3 password
[Enable] [Disable] [Printer] <etc>

#
if off
[Sector]
~
See Control
menu map 2-1
[MSector]
Params
1-255
[Aux Rly] <etc> [Sounder]

~
} [Action]
if on
[On] [Q]
[Test] [Paper Fd] [Off] [Q]

8 Line
feeds
[E] [C] [Q]
Params
1-2
Params
1-207
Params
1-8
Params
1-4
} [On] [Off] [Pulse] {
[Action]
Params
1-207
[E] [C] [Q]
Access level 3
[Pause]
[All] [Signal1] [Signal2] [Signal3]
Params
0-30sec
} [E] [C] [Q]

{
[E] [C] [Q]
[IO Line]
~
Params
1-4
Params
1-207
[Sounder] <etc> [Sector]

~
~
[Device]
Params
1-8
[Loop]
[E] [C] [Q]
Params
1-32
Params
1-255
Params
1-255
[On] [Off]
Params
0-15
} [E] [C] [Q]
Params
1-128
} [E] [C] [Q]
} [E] [C] [Q]
Params
1-207
} [Loop]
Params
1-8
} [E] [C] [Q]
Access
level 2b
[E] [C] [Q]

[E] [C] [Q]
Params
1-255
[E] [C] [Q]
Key
[E] = [Enter]
[C] = [Cancel]
[Q] = [Quit]
[Device]
Params
1-255
} [E] [C] [Q]
Access level 2a
- These menu options will appear on

a Vigilon Compact VA panel only
} [E] [C] [Domain]
} [E] [C] [Q]

[MAlarm]
[MSector]
~
<etc> [AuxRly]
[Comms]
[E] [C] [Q]
Params
0-15
} [E] [C]
{
Params
1-8
Params
MM:SS
0-10min
[End] [Stop]
[Zone] [Group] <etc> [Build]

~
~
} [E] [C] [Q]
Params
HH:MM:SS
} [Delayed]
[Build] <etc> [Sound] [Silence] [Reset] <etc> [Verify] [Audio] <etc> [StartMA] [StopMA] [UserCode]
~
See Control
menu
map 2-2
[On] [Off]
[Node]
~ - These menu options are not applicable for a Network node.
Params
1-16
[E] [C] [Q]
[E] [C] [Q] [Off] [Sig1] [Sig2] [Sig3]
[Off] [Signal1] [Signal2] [Signal3]
} [Delay][On] [Off] {
} [E] [C] [Q]
[E] [C] [Q]
# - The Print option will only appear if a

printer is connected to the panel.
[Sensing]
~
Params
1-8
Params
1-16
[DelayBlk]
~
<etc>
[Loop]
{
{
} [On] [Off]
******
P R I N T E R T E S T
******
!"#$%&'()*+,-./0123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGH
IJKLMNOPQRSRUVWXYZ[=]^-àbcdefghijklmnop
qrstuvwxyz{|}
[Timeslot]
~
[Loop]
}
}
[Digital]
~
Params
1-255
} [E] [C] [Q] {
Params
1-2
Params
0-3
[Port]
[Audio] <etc>
~
See Control
menu map 2-3
} [E] [C] [Q]
[E] [C] [Q]

Access level 2b
93
EN Vigilon Control panel with MCC/MCB at V4.43 or higher

[Control] Menu map 2-1 to 2-3
Key
Access level 1
[E] = [Enter]
[C] = [Cancel]
[Q] = [Quit]
Control
menu map 2-1
Menus accessible with panel door open
Access level 2b
Menus accessible with panel door open and AL2 password
Access level 3
[Sector]
Access level 3
{
{
[Off]
Params
1-32
Params
1-8
[Option]
This option will only be displayed with Freeblocks

switched On, see Test Engineering
[Loop]
[Action]
[Signal1] [Signal2]
[From] [E] [C][Q]
No menus are accessible at AL1
Access level 2a
[Signal3]
[From] [E] [C][Q] [From] [E] [C][Q]
[Sig1] [Sig2] [Sig3]
[Off] [Sig1]
[Off] [Sig1] [Sig2]

[E] [C] [Q]
EN Vigilon Compact Voice Alarm Control panel only with MCB at V4.43 or higher
Control
menu map 2-2
Control
menu map 2-3
[Audio]
[Audio]
Access level 3
[Music]
[Off] [On]
[Message]
Params
0-31
[Aux Msg]
Params
0-31
94
[Off] [On]
} [Alm Zone]
Params
1-10
} [E] [C] [Q] {
[PA]
<etc>
[PA]
[Music]
[Off] [On]
Params
1-10
} [E] [C] [Q]
[Per Msg]
Access level 3
[E] [C] [Q]

Access level 2b
Message
Access level 2b
[Micphone]
[Message]
Tone
[E] [C] [Q]
<etc> [Alm Msg]
Params
1-10
[E] [C] [Q]
Params
1-10
[E] [C] [Q]

[Set Up] Menu map 1
Access level 1
Access level 2a
[Set Up]
[Option]
Access level 2b
[SetClock]
[Test/Eng]
[Info]
[UserCode]
<etc>
<etc>
[Modify] [Enter]
[Assign] [Remove]
[Set Up]
See Setup
menu map 2-1
See Set up
menu map 3
<etc>
[Action]
[Deaction]
These options will only be displayed with Freeblocks

<etc>
[Backup] [Recover]
# [Save]
[Next] [Retard] [Advance] [Enter]
[Period] <etc> [Signal 1] [Signal 2]

~
~
~
[Sound]
~
[Sector]
[MAlarm]
{ Params
1-32 }
{ Params
}
1-8
[NVM Card]
[En] [Dis]
[Loop]
[Output]
{ Params
0-15 }
[Action] [NoAction]
[Disable]
/[Enable]
[NoAction] [Signal1] [Signal2] [Signal3]
[Signal 3] <etc>
~
[Buzzer]
[Sounder]
[E] [C]
{ Params
0-15 }
[NVM Card] [SD Card]
{ Params
0-15 }
[Q]
[NVM Card] [SD Card]
[E] [C] [Q]
Enter upto 8 FAB/SAB pairs
{ Params
1-2s }
[Protect] <etc>
See Setup
menu map 2-2
- The [Save] option will only appear under the customer password at
(access level 2), which is used to save changes to labels and clock settings.
[Label]
[Control]
[E] [C] [Q]
[E] [C] [Q]
[E] [C] [Q]
- [SD Card] option is for Vigilon Compact panel

only when a SD Card is fitted.
Access level 3
[E] [C] [Q]

~ - These menu options are not applicable at a Network node.
[MCP]
~
[IO Line]
~
[Device] <etc> [Zone]

~
~
[Local] [Custom] <etc>
[E] [C] [Q]
{ Params
1-4 }
{ Params
}
1-207
[Device]
[Loop]
{ Params
} [E] [C] [Q]
1-8
Enter Label
[E] [C] [Q]

{Params
1-128 }
[Auto Fire] [Man Fire]
[E] [C] [Q]
[MCP]; <etc>
Key
[E] = [Enter]
[C] = [Cancel]
[Q] = [Quit]
[E] [C] [Q]

Enter Label
95

[Set Up] Menu map 2-1 and 2-2
Access level 1
Setup
menu map 2-1
[Assign] [Remove]
Access level 3
[Device]
~
[IO Line]
~
[MCP] <etc>
~
[Sector]
~
{ Params
1-207 }
[Loop]
{ Params
} [Device]
1-4
{ Params
1-32 }
{ Params
}
1-8
[Sector] [Zone] [Group]
{ Params
}
1-207
{ Params
} [MSector]
1-8
{ Params
1-32 }
[E] [C] [Q]
{ Params
} [Sector]
1-8
{ Params
1-128 }
{ Params
1-32 }
[E] [C] [Q]
[Loop]
{ Params
1-255 }
[DelayBlk] <etc> [MAlarm]
[MGroup]
{ Params
0-128 }
[Loop]
[AlmZone]
[Build]
[AuxRly]
[E] [C] [Q] { Params } [Sound]

{ Params
1-255 }
1-255
{ Params
} [E] [C] [Q]
1-8
[E] [C] [Q]
{ Params
1-10 }
[E] [C] [Q]
[Group]
~
[E] [C] [Q]
<etc>
[Silence] [Reset]
[E] [C] [Q]
[MSector]
{ Params
1-16 }
[MSector]
{ Params
1-2 }
[E] [C] [Q]

{ Params
1-255 }
[E] [C] [Q]

{ Params
1-255 }
Applicable for Vigilon

Compact VA only
Setup
menu map 2-2
[Action] [Deaction]
Access level 3
[Sector]
~
{ Params
1-32 }
[Loop]
{ Params
}
1-8
[Sector]
{ Params
}
1-32
[Loop]
{ Params
}
1-8
[Signal1] [Signal2] [Signal3]
[E] [C] [Q]
96
[MSector]
{ Params
1-255 }
[DelayBlk]
{ Params
} [E] [C] [Q]
1-16
{ Params
}
1-255
[DelayBlk]
<etc>
{ Params
}
1-2
[MSector]
[E] [C] [Q]
[AuxRly]
[Sector]
~
<etc>
[Fault] [Disable]
{ Params
1-16 }
[Sector] [DelayBlk]
{ Params
}
1-32
[Loop]
{ Params
}
1-32
[Loop]
{ Params
}
1-8
[E] [C] [Q]
{ Params
}
1-8
[E] [C] [Q]
{ Params
} [E] [C] [Q]
1-16
[E] [C] [Q]
Key
[E] = [Enter]
[C] = [Cancel]
[Q] = [Quit]
Access level 1
Access level 3
[Device]
~
[AuxRly]
[Build]
{ Params
1-16 }
[Day]
See Set Up
Menu map 4-1
Access level 2b
Access level 3
[DelayBlk] [Zone]
~
[TimeSlot]
~
<etc>
[Enable]
Access level 2a
<etc>
[Global] [Sector] <etc> [DST]

~
[Messages]
[Verify]
~
<etc> [Audio]
~
[TimeBlok]
[Action]
{ Params
1-16 }
Params
{HH:MM:SS
} [E] [C] [Q]
{ Params
0-15 }
[Delayed]
{ Params
MM:SS }
[E] [C] [Q]
[Mon] [Tue] [Wed] <etc> [Thu] [Fri] [Sat] <etc> [Sun] [And] [Or]
{ Params
1-32 }
[E] [C] [Q]
0-10min
[Signal1]
[Signal2] [Signal3]
<etc>
See Set Up
menu Map 4-3
See Set Up
menu Map 4-2
Params
{ HH:MM:SS
} [Disable]

V4.43_5/2/10
Set up
menu map 3
[Set Up] Menu map 3
[Set Up]
<etc>
[Loop]
{ Params
} [Sounder]
1-8
Params
{ 0-10min
} [E] [C] [Q]
MM:SS
[Off] [NoAction] <etc>
[Off] [On]
[E] [C] [Q]

[From] [E] [C] [Q] [From] [E] [C] [Q] [From] [E] [C] [Q]
{ Params
}
1-2
[Delayed]
[E] [C] [Q]
[Off] [On]
[Sig1]
Params
{ 0-10min
} [E] [C] [Q]
[Off] [Sig1]
[Sig2] [Sig3]
[Off] [Sig1] [Sig2]
[Reset] [Silence] [Sound] [Verify]
MM:SS
[E] [C] [Q]
Params
1-207
[E] [C] [Q]

[Input]
[Loop]
{ Params
} [State]
1-8
Key
[E] = [Enter]
[C] = [Cancel]
[Q] = [Quit]
[Output]
[Both] [None]
[S Cubed]
[TimeBlok] <etc> [SAFE]
[Card]
<etc>
{ Params
} [E] [C] [Q]
1-8
[Device]
~
enable (on)
MGroup
[Enable] [Disable] [Start] [End]
Params
0-15
[Volume]
[State]
} disable
(off)
[Soft St]
{ Params
0-15 }
{
{ Params
0-15 }
[Signal]
Params
16-100
[Output] [Link] [Unlink]
[All] [Fire]
[E] [C] [Q]
[E] [C] [Q]
[Find Dev] [Signal1] [Signal2] [Signal3]
{ Params
0-255 }
{ Params
0-255 }
[E] [C] [Q]
{ Params
1-207 }
[Loop]
[E] [C] [Q]
[E] [C] [Q]
[E] [C] [Q]
{ Params
0-100 }
Voice/Tone
number
[Step]
{ Params
1-100 }
[E] [C] [Q]
Params
1-8
MGroup
Params
1-8
01:00 0 25-31 3 1 0
(HH:MM Day Date 1 Date 2 month offsets)
[E] [C] [Q] [All] [Fire] [Off]

[MGroup]
[Auto Zone] [ManZone]
[E] [C] [Q]
{ Params
1-8 }
[E] [C] [Q]
{ Params
1-128 }
[E] [C] [Q]
97

V4.43 or higher
Set up
menu map 4-1
[Set Up] Menu map 4-1, 4-2 and 4-3 [Build]

Access level 3
{ Params
1-255 }
[Trigger]
Enter text to be displayed

[IO Line]
~
[TimeBlk]
[Sector]
~
<etc>
{ Params
}
1-48
[Device]
{ Params
}
1-32
{ Params
}
1-207
[Loop]
{ Params
} [E] [C] [Q]
1-8
[MSector]
{ Params
}
1-255
[Loop]
[Channel]
~
Key
[E] = [Enter]
[C] = [Cancel]
[Q] = [Quit]
[None]
{ Params
}
1-207
[Print]
[Both]
[None]
[E] [C] [Q]

[E] [C] [Q]
[Loop]
[Start MA] [Stop MA]
{ Params
} [E] [C] [Q]
1-8
[NoAction]
[E] [C] [Q]
[Reversb]
[UserCode]
[E] [C] [Q]
Access to whole
of [Control] menu
[Not Revs]
[E] [C] [Q]

Set up
menu map 4-3
Set up
menu map 4-2
[Zone]
~
[Mode]
[Zone]
<etc>
[Display]
[E] [C] [Q] { Params } [Device]

1-6
[E] [C] [Q]

{ Params
} [E] [C] [Q] { Params
1-8
1-15 }
{ Params
1-128 }
[Label]
[Action]
[Audio] Access level 3

~
Access level 3
[TimeBlok]
[1stDev] [AllDev]
[E] [C] [Q]
[E] [C] [Q]

{ Params
0-15 }
[Task]
{ Params
}
1-8
[Trigger]
{ Params
}
1-255
[Sensors]
{ Params
}
0-3
[PreFires]
[PA]
[Remove]
[A]
[Action]
{ Params
}
0-3
[Fires]
{ Params
}
0-3
[SuperFires]
[E] [C] [Q]
[B]
[Music]
[Tone]
[Deaction]
[Microphone] <etc> [Aux Msg]
[E] [C] [Q]

{ Params
0-15 }
[Tone]
{ Params
} [Tone]
1-3
[E] [C] [Q] { Params } [E] [C] [Q]

{ Params
1-10 }
1-31
[Action]
[Deaction]
[Per Msg] <etc>
[TimeBlock]
[Message]
[E] [C] [Q]

{ Params
0-31 }
[Action]
[Deaction]
<etc>
[Slot]
[E] [C] [Q] { Params } [E] [C] [Q] { Params } [E] [C] [Q] { Params
[Tone]
{ Params
1-8 }
1-10 }
0-15
1-10
[Interval]
[Message] [TimeSlot]
<etc>
[E] [C] [Q]

{ Params
0-255 }
[E] [C] [Q] { Params } [E] [C] [Q]

{ Params
0-31 }
0-15
These menu options are for a Vigilon Compact VA panel only
98

V4.43 or higher
[Control]
[Set Up]
[Info]
[Info] Menu map
[Display] [Print]
[E]
[Card]
<etc>
[Events]
[MCP]
~
[Node]
[E]
{ Params
0-15 }
[E] [C] [Node]

{ Params
1-255 }
{ Params
1-255 }
[E] [C] [Q]

{ Params
1-255 }
[E]
{ Params
}
1-207
Access level 2b
[Card]
[Node]

~
~
[TimeAvg]
[Local] <etc>
[E] [C] [Q]
[Device]
{ Params
}
1-207
[Loop]
[Map]
[Loop Map]
{ Params
}
1-8
[Exception]
[HistFire] <etc>
[Sounders] <etc>
<etc>
[TimeSlot]
~
<etc>
[Net Map]~
[Device] [E]
{ Params
} [E] [C] [Q]
1-207
[R] [P] [N] [C]
[Supervis]
[Active]
[Status]
{ Params
} [E] [C] [Q]
1-8
[E] [C] [Q]

{Params
1-128 }
[Loop]
{ Params
1-6 }
{ Params
} [E] [C] [Q]
1-8
<etc>
[Fault] [Disable] [Warning]
[IO Line]
~
These options will only appear if a printer is fitted.
[UserCode]
[Device]
{ Params
1-4 }
[P] [N] [Q]
[E]
[Label]
[Test/Eng]
[Q]
{ Params
} [E] [C] [Q]
0-15
~ - will only appear if
a network card is fitted
in the control panel
- The [SD Card] option is for a Vigilon Compact panel

only when an SD Card is fitted.
[DelayBlk]
~
[AuxRly]
<etc> [Build]
[SD Card]
[E] [C] [Q]

{ Params
1-100 }
[Log]
[Historic]
[Active]

[Test]
{ Params
0-15 }
[E]
Params
1-255
} [E] [C] [Q]
{ Params
} [E]
1-255
[Node]
[E]
{ Params
0-15 }
[P] [N] [Q]
[Sector]
~
{ Params
}
1-32
[P] [N] [Q]

[Card] <etc> [Zone]
~
[Group]
~
[Network]
<etc> [SectLink]
~
[DelayLink]
~
{ Params
} [Loop]
1-32
[Loop]
{ Params
} [E] [C] [Q]
1-128
{ Params
} [Loop]
1-207
[MGroup]
{ Params
}
0-15
1-8
[E] [C] [Q]
Default
Sig1 65 00 65 00 65 00 65 00
Sig2 4F 25 4F 25 4F 25 4F 25
Sig3 4F 00 4F 00 4F 00 4F 00
[E]
Access level 2a
[Device]
~
{ Params
}
1-16
[Config] [Start]
[E] [Card]
[MSLink]
{ Params
} [E] [C] [Domain]
1-255
{ Params
} [E] [C] [Q]
1-255
[E] [C] [Q]
[E] [C] [Q]
<etc>
[E] [C] [Q]
[Audio]
~
[E] [C] [Q]

[Alm Zone]
<etc>
[Message]
[E] [C] [Node]
{ Params
} [E] [C] [Q] { Params }
1-8
1-255
{ Params
} [E] [C] [Q]
1-2
<etc> [DST]
~ - These menu options are not applicable

at a Network node.
{ Params
} [E] [C] [Q]
1-8
[MSector]
10
15
15
{ Params
} [E] [C] [Q]
1-2
[Card]
[Device]
{ Params
} [Loop]
0-15
1-207
{ Params
} [E] [C] [Q]
1-8
[Global]
<etc>
[E] [C] [Q]

Key
[E] = [Enter]
[C] = [Cancel]
[Q] = [Quit]
[P] = [Previous]
[N] = [Next]
{ Params
} [E] [C] [Q]
1-10
Example
Audio Control
Music Off
Microphone Tone 2
Aux Msg 2,9 2,10 2,14
PA Tone 2
PA Alm Zone A : 1
PA Alm Zone B : 1
Music TimeBlock: 0
Music Alm Zone: 1
These options for are for a

Vigilon Compact VA panel only
99

V4.43 or higher
[Test/Eng] Menu map 1 [Control] [Set Up] [Info] [Test/Eng]
[DispTest]

[UserCode]
[Loop]
~
see Test/Eng
menu map 2-1
Access level 3
[Card]
[Config]
<etc>
[Test]
[Remote]+ <etc> [Comms] [Global] [Routing] <etc>
[Message]
[PSU]
[FreeBlok]
[Previous] [Next] [E]
{ Params
}
1-255
[Enter]
{ Params
}
1-255
[Datalog]
[Test]
[E] [C] [Q]

[E] [C] [Q]
{ Params
0-15 }
[Enter] [Domain]
[E] [C] [Q]
[E] [C] [Q]
[Off]
~
{ Params
}
1-255
[1] [2] [Both]
[E] [C] [Q]

{ Params
0-15 }
[E] [C] [Q]
{ Params
} [E] [C] [Q]
0-15
{ Params
} [E] [C] [Q]
0-3
Access level 2b
[Clear]
[Fault]
[Disable] [Exception]
[E] [Card]
{ Params
}
0-15
[E]
[NewPass]
[Buzzer]
[All]
[Node]
Enter an
access code
<etc>
{ Params
1-128 }
[Language] [Label] <etc>

~long labels
[Zone]
~
[Sensors]
[All Dev]
[E] [C] [Q]

[Disable] [Fault] [Fire] <etc> [Supervis] [Build] <etc>
Mns DC
see Test/Eng
menu map 2-2
[No Silence]
[E] [C] [Q]
Bt1 BC1 Bt2 BC2 MA1 MA2

74
74
75
4/6 Loop panel 214 141 206 206 0

0
74
2 Loop panel 206 138 200 203 0
0
74
2 Loop VA panel 195 139 202 206 0
0
74
Displayed on 4/6 Loop panel with PSU at V1.00'
Displayed on 2 Loop panel with PSU at V2.05
[Comms]
[No Reset]
/ [Reset]
[E] [C] [Q]

{ Params
1-128 }
[Display]
[Delayblk] <etc> [Bypass]
Ear Lpv
60 221
65 197
65 198
[Co-incid]
~
[Delay]
<etc>
[Contrast] [Zone]
[Off]
Params
MM-SS
0-10
} [E] [C] [Q]
[P] [N] [E]
[P] [N] [E]
Range 0-31
(default 15)
[Off] [On]
[E] [C] [Q]
English - Espanol - Portugues - Cestina - Brazilian
~ - These menu options are not applicable for a Network node

# - This option is only applicable for Vigilon Compact panel fitted with an SD card
+ - This option is not applicable for a Vigilon Compact nor Vigilon Compact VA panels
[On]
~
[Zone]
[Off/On]
[E] [C] [Q]
100
[Off] [On]
Note: Bt2 and BC2

are only applicable
for 6 Loop panel
Typical values:
[E] [C] [Q]
{ Params
} [E]
1-255
[P] [N] [Q]
[Card] [Port]
Enter message to be displayed
[SD Card] #
[NVM Card]
[No Silence]
[Q] [Off] [On]
[R]
{ Params
} [E] [C] [Q]
0-15
[On/Off] [No Reset]
[On/Off]
Off Controller Card 1 to 15
[Update]#
[Init]
[Domain]
<etc>
[Commissn]
~
AL2b
Access level 2b
[Reset]
[Network]

[Option]
Access level 2a
[Off] [On]
~
[Flashing]
~
[E] [C] [Q]
[Zone]
[Group]
[E] [C] [Q]

Key
[E] = [Enter]
[C] = [Cancel]
[Q] = [Quit]
[P] = [Previous]
[N] = [Next]

[Test/Eng] Menu map 2
Access level 1
[Loop]
Access level 3
[Allocate] [Stop]
<etc>
[FindDev]
{Params
}
1-8
[Gain]
[Flame]
[Start]
{ Params
0-7 }
{Params
} [E] [C] [Q]
1-8
{Params
1-207 }
[E] [C] [Q]
{ Params
}
1-207
[Device]
[Loop]
[Align]
{ Params
}
1-207
{Params
1-207 }
[Device]
[Loop]
Test/Eng
menu map 2-2
[Comms]
Access level 3
{ Params
} [E] [C] [Q]
0-15
Card 0 (MCC/MCB)
[Address]
{Params
}
1-8
{Params
} [Device]
0-6
[Loop]
{ Params
1-207 }
{ Params
} [E] [C] [Q]
1-8
[Repair]
<etc>
{ Params
} [Loop]
1-8
[E] [C] [Q]
Access level 2b
[Loop]
{Params
1-207 }
{Params
}
1-8
[E] [C] [Q]
[N] [P] [E]

Gain clock period 50008
{ Params
} [E] [C] [Q]
0-255
for other cards
[Baud]
[Baud]
[N] [P] [E]
[N] [P] [E]

MCB
RS485 Port 0 - dedicated Rpt

RS232 Port 1 Std - Printer - Flt/Fire
RS232 Port 2 Universal - Ascom- Off
USB
[PreFire] [Fire] [SupFire]
[Loop]
[E] [C] [Q]
[Simulate]
[Domain]
{ Params
} [E] [C] [Q]
1-255
0-3 } [E] [C] [Q]

{ Params
PORT
[Mode]
<etc>
[Device]
{Params
1-207 }
[Beam]
{ Params
0-63 }
[AutoGain]
{ Params
} [E] [C] [Q]
1-8
1-8
[Card]
Test/Eng
menu map 2-1
Port 3
MCC
RS232 Port 0 - Std - Off

RS485 Port 1 - Std
USB Port 3
As Switches
50
!
600
1200
1800
2400
3600
4800
7200
9600
19200
38400
57600
115200
230400
460800
Factory default Port settings

with Control Panel having:
MCB
MCC
Port 0
Port 0
Port 1/2
Port 1
Key
[E] = [Enter]
[C] = [Cancel]
[Q] = [Quit]
[P] = [Previous]
[N] = [Next]
101
Appendix A-2 - Menu maps for BS (V3+) Vigilon panels
The menu options [Control], [SetUp], [Info] and [Test/Eng] are accessible on pressing the MENU ON/OFF button.
BS Vigilon Control panel with MCC at V3.97 or higher

Access level 1
[Control] Menu map 1 Access level 2a
Access level 2a
[Control] [Set Up] [ Info ]

[ Test/Eng ]
[Enable] [Disable] [Printer] <etc>

#
if off
[Sector]
~
See Control
menu map 2-1
[MSector]
Params
1-255
[Aux Rly] <etc> [Sounder]

~
} [Action]
if on
[On] [Q]
[Test] [Paper Fd] [Off] [Q]

8 Line
feeds
[E] [C] [Q]
Params
1-2
Params
1-207
Params
1-8
Params
1-4
} [On] [Off] [Pulse] {
[Action]
Params
1-207
[E] [C] [Q]
Access level 3
Params
0-30sec
} [E] [C] [Q]

{
[E] [C] [Q]
[IO Line]
~
Params
1-4
Params
1-207
102
[Sounder] <etc> [Sector]

~
~
[Device]
Params
1-8
[Loop]
[E] [C] [Q]
Params
1-32
Params
1-255
Params
0-15
} [E] [C] [Q]
Params
1-128
} [E] [C] [Q]
} [E] [C] [Q]
Params
1-207
} [Loop]
Params
1-8
} [E] [C] [Q]
[E] [C] [Q]
<etc> [StartMA] [StopMA] [UserCode]
Access
level 2b
[E] [C] [Q]

Params
1-255
[End] [Stop]
Key
[E] = [Enter]
[C] = [Cancel]
[Q] = [Quit]
Params
1-255
} [E] [C] [Q]
Access level 2a
} [E] [C] [Domain]
} [E] [C] [Q]

[MAlarm]
[MSector]
~
<etc> [AuxRly]
[Comms]
[E] [C] [Q]
Params
0-15
} [E] [C]
{
Params
1-8
Params
MM:SS
0-10min
[Device]
[E] [C] [Q]
[Node]
[Zone] [Group] <etc> [Build]

~
~
} [E] [C] [Q]
} [Delayed]
} [On] [Off]
Params
1-255
~ - These menu options are not applicable for a Network node.
[On] [Off]
[Build] <etc> [Sound] [Silence] [Reset] <etc> [Verify]
[Pause]
[All] [Signal1] [Signal2] [Signal3]
Params
HH:MM:SS
Params
1-16
[E] [C] [Q]
[E] [C] [Q] [Off] [Sig1] [Sig2] [Sig3]
} [Delay][On] [Off] {
} [E] [C] [Q]
[E] [C] [Q]
# - The Print option will only appear if a

printer is connected to the panel.
[Sensing]
~
Params
1-8
Params
1-16
[DelayBlk]
~
<etc>
[Loop]
} [On] [Off]
******
P R I N T E R T E S T
******
!"#$%&'()*+,-./0123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGH
IJKLMNOPQRSRUVWXYZ[=]^-àbcdefghijklmnop
qrstuvwxyz{|}
[Timeslot]
~
[Loop]
}
}
[Digital]
~
Params
1-255
} [E] [C] [Q] {
Params
1-2
Params
0-3
<etc>
[Port]
} [E] [C] [Q]
[E] [C] [Q]

Access level 2b
BS Vigilon Voice Alarm Control panel with MCC at V3.97 or higher

[Control] Menu map 2-1
Key
Access level 1
Control
menu map 2-1
[Sector]
Access level 3
{
{
[Off]
Params
1-32
Params
1-8
[Sig1] [Sig2] [Sig3]
Access level 2b
Access level 3
[Option]
This option will only be displayed with Freeblocks

[Loop]
[Action]
[Signal1] [Signal2]
[From] [E] [C][Q]
Access level 2a
[E] = [Enter]
[C] = [Cancel]
[Q] = [Quit]
[Signal3]
[From] [E] [C][Q] [From] [E] [C][Q]

[Off] [Sig1]
[Off] [Sig1] [Sig2]

[E] [C] [Q]
103

[Set Up] Menu map 1
Access level 2a
[Control]
[Set Up]
[Test/Eng]
[Info]
[Option]
Access level 2b
[SetClock]

[UserCode]
<etc>
<etc>
[Modify] [Enter]
[Assign] [Remove]
[Set Up]
See Setup
menu map 2-1
See Set up
menu map 3
<etc>
[Action]

[Deaction]
<etc>
# [Save]
[Next] [Retard] [Advance] [Enter]
[Period] <etc> [Signal 1] [Signal 2]

~
~
~
[Sound]
~
[Sector]
[MAlarm]
[En] [Dis]
[Loop]
[Output]
{ Params
0-15 }
[Action] [NoAction]
[Disable]
/[Enable]
[NoAction] [Signal1] [Signal2] [Signal3]
[Signal 3] <etc>
~
[Buzzer]
[Sounder]
{ Params
}
1-8
[NVM Card]
See Setup
menu map 2-2
- The [Save] option will only appear under the customer password at
(access level 2), which is used to save changes to labels and clock settings.
[Label]
{ Params
1-32 }
[Protect] <etc>
[Backup] [Recover]
{ Params
0-15 }
{ Params
0-15 }
[NVM Card]
[Q]
[NVM Card]
[E] [C] [Q]
Enter upto 8 FAB/SAB pairs
{ Params
1-2s }
[E] [C]
[E] [C] [Q]
[E] [C] [Q]
[E] [C] [Q]

Access level 3
[E] [C] [Q]

[MCP]
~
[IO Line]
~

~
~
[Local] [Custom] <etc>
[E] [C] [Q]
{ Params
1-4 }
{ Params
}
1-207
[Device]
[Loop]
{ Params
} [E] [C] [Q]
1-8
104
Enter Label
[E] [C] [Q]

{Params
1-128 }
[Auto Fire] [Man Fire]
[E] [C] [Q]
[MCP]; <etc>
Key
[E] = [Enter]
[C] = [Cancel]
[Q] = [Quit]
[E] [C] [Q]

Enter Label

Access level 1
Setup
menu map 2-1
[Assign] [Remove]
Access level 3
[Device]
~
[IO Line]
~
[MCP] <etc>
~
[Sector]
~
{ Params
1-207 }
[Loop]
{ Params
} [Device]
1-4
{ Params
1-32 }
{ Params
}
1-8
[Sector] [Zone] [Group]
{ Params
}
1-207
{ Params
} [MSector]
1-8
{ Params
1-32 }
[E] [C] [Q]
{ Params
} [Sector]
1-8
{ Params
1-128 }
{ Params
1-32 }
[E] [C] [Q]
[Loop]
{ Params
1-255 }
[Loop]
[Group]
~
[DelayBlk] <etc> [MAlarm]
[MGroup]
{ Params
0-128 }
[Build]
[AuxRly]
[E] [C] [Q] { Params } [Sound]

{ Params
1-255 }
1-255
{ Params
} [E] [C] [Q]
1-8
[E] [C] [Q]
[E] [C] [Q]
<etc>
[Silence] [Reset]
[E] [C] [Q]
[MSector]
{ Params
1-16 }
[MSector]
{ Params
1-2 }
[E] [C] [Q]

{ Params
1-255 }
[E] [C] [Q]

{ Params
1-255 }
Setup
menu map 2-2
[Action] [Deaction]
Access level 3
[Sector]
~
{ Params
1-32 }
[Loop]
{ Params
}
1-8
[Sector]
{ Params
}
1-32
[Loop]
{ Params
}
1-8
[MSector]
{ Params
1-255 }
[DelayBlk]
{ Params
}
1-255
{ Params
} [E] [C] [Q]
1-16
[E] [C] [Q]
[DelayBlk]
<etc>
{ Params
}
1-2
[MSector]
[E] [C] [Q]
[AuxRly]
[Sector]
~
<etc>
[Fault] [Disable]
{ Params
1-16 }
[Sector] [DelayBlk]
{ Params
}
1-32
[Loop]
{ Params
}
1-32
[Loop]
{ Params
}
1-8
[E] [C] [Q]
{ Params
}
1-8
[E] [C] [Q]
{ Params
} [E] [C] [Q]
1-16
[E] [C] [Q]
Key
[E] = [Enter]
[C] = [Cancel]
[Q] = [Quit]
105

Access level 1
[Set Up] Menu map 3
Set up
Access level 2a
menu map 3
[Set Up]
Access level 3
[Device]
~
[AuxRly]
[Build]
{ Params
1-16 }
[Day]
See Set Up
Menu map 4-1
[Enable]
Params
HH:MM:SS
Access level 2b
Access level 3
[DelayBlk] [Zone]
~
[TimeSlot]
~
<etc>
<etc>
[Global] [Sector] <etc> [DST]

~
[Messages]
[Verify]
~
<etc> [Audio]
~
[TimeBlok]
[Action]
{ Params
1-16 }
Params
{HH:MM:SS
} [E] [C] [Q]
{ Params
0-15 }
See Set Up
menu Map 4-3
See Set Up
menu Map 4-2
} [Disable]
[Delayed]
{ Params
MM:SS }
[E] [C] [Q]
[Mon] [Tue] [Wed] <etc> [Thu] [Fri] [Sat] <etc> [Sun] [And] [Or]
{ Params
1-32 }
[E] [C] [Q]
0-10min
[Signal1]
[Signal2] [Signal3]
<etc>
<etc>
[Loop]
{ Params
} [Sounder]
1-8
Params
{ 0-10min
} [E] [C] [Q]
MM:SS
[Off] [NoAction] <etc>
[Off] [On]
[E] [C] [Q]

[From] [E] [C] [Q] [From] [E] [C] [Q] [From] [E] [C] [Q]
{ Params
}
1-2
[Delayed]
[E] [C] [Q]
[Off] [On]
[Sig1]
Params
{ 0-10min
} [E] [C] [Q]
[Off] [Sig1]
[Sig2] [Sig3]
[Off] [Sig1] [Sig2]
[Reset] [Silence] [Sound] [Verify]
MM:SS
[E] [C] [Q]
Params
1-207
[E] [C] [Q]

[Input]
[Loop]
{ Params
} [State]
1-8
Key
[E] = [Enter]
[C] = [Cancel]
[Q] = [Quit]
[Output]
[Both] [None]
[S Cubed]
[TimeBlok] <etc> [SAFE]
[Card]
<etc>
{ Params
} [E] [C] [Q]
1-8
[Device]
~
enable (on)
MGroup
[Enable] [Disable] [Start] [End]

[Volume]
[State]
{ Params
0-15 } disable (off)
[Soft St]
{ Params
0-15 }
{
{ Params
0-15 }
[Signal]
Params
16-100
{ Params
1-207 }
[Loop]
{ Params
}
1-8
[All] [Fire]
[E] [C] [Q]
[E] [C] [Q]
[Find Dev] [Signal1] [Signal2] [Signal3]
{ Params
1-8 }
{
{ Params
0-255 }
106
[E] [C] [Q]
[E] [C] [Q]

Voice/Tone
number
Params
0-100
[Step]
{ Params
1-100 }
[E] [C] [Q]
01:00 0 25-31 3 1 0
(HH:MM Day Date 1 Date 2 month offsets)
[E] [C] [Q] [All] [Fire] [Off]
MGroup
Params
0-255
[E] [C] [Q]
[E] [C] [Q]
[MGroup]
[Auto Zone] [ManZone]
[E] [C] [Q]
{ Params
1-8 }
[E] [C] [Q]
{ Params
1-128 }
[E] [C] [Q]
BS Vigilon Control panel with MCC at

V3.97 or higher
Set up
menu map 4-1
[Build]

{ Params
1-255 }
[Trigger]
Access level 3
[Label]
[Action]
Enter text to be displayed

[IO Line]
~
[TimeBlk]
[Sector]
~
<etc>
{ Params
}
1-48
[Device]
{ Params
}
1-32
{ Params
}
1-207
[Loop]
{ Params
} [E] [C] [Q]
1-8
[MSector]
{ Params
}
1-255
[Loop]
[E] [C] [Q] { Params } [Device]

1-6
[E] [C] [Q]

{ Params
1-8
1-15 }
Key
[E] = [Enter]
[C] = [Cancel]
[Q] = [Quit]
[Channel]
~
{ Params
}
1-207
[Loop]
{ Params
} [E] [C] [Q]
1-8
[None]
<etc>
[Display]
[Print]
[Both]
[None]
[E] [C] [Q]

[E] [C] [Q]
[Start MA] [Stop MA]
[NoAction]
[E] [C] [Q]
[Reversb]
[E] [C] [Q]
[UserCode]
Access to whole
of [Control] menu
[Not Revs]
[E] [C] [Q]

Set up
menu map 4-2
[Zone]
~
{ Params
1-128 }
[Mode]
[Zone]
Access level 3
[TimeBlok]
[1stDev] [AllDev]
[E] [C] [Q]
Params
0-15
} [E] [C] [Q]
[Task]
{ Params
}
1-8
[Trigger]
{ Params
}
1-255
[Sensors]
{ Params
}
0-3
[PreFires]
{ Params
}
0-3
[Fires]
{ Params
}
0-3
[SuperFires]
[Remove]
[E] [C] [Q]
107

V3.97 or higher
[Control]
[Set Up]
[Info]
[Info] Menu map
[Display] [Print]
[Historic]
[Active]
[E]
[Card]
<etc>
[Events]
[MCP]
~
[Node]
[E]
{ Params
0-15 }
[E] [C] [Node]

{ Params
1-255 }
{ Params
1-255 }
[E] [C] [Q]

{ Params
1-255 }
[E]
{ Params
}
1-207
Access level 2b
[Fault]
[Card]
[TimeAvg]
[Local] <etc>
[E] [C] [Q]
{ Params
1-6 }
[Device]
{ Params
}
1-207
[Loop]
[Status]
[Map]
[Loop Map]
{ Params
}
1-8
{ Params
} [E] [C] [Q]
1-8
[E] [C] [Q]

{Params
1-128 }
[Loop]
<etc>
[Net Map]~
[Device] [E]
{ Params
} [E] [C] [Q]
1-207
[Q]
{ Params
} [E] [C] [Q]
0-15
~ - will only appear if
a network card is fitted
in the control panel
[R] [P] [N] [C]
[Supervis]
[Active]
[Node]

~
~
These options will only appear if a printer is fitted.
{ Params
} [E] [C] [Q]
1-8
<etc>
[Warning]
[IO Line]
~

[Test/Eng]
[UserCode]
[Device]
{ Params
1-4 }
[P] [N] [Q]
[E]
[Label]
[HistFire] <etc>
[SubFault]
[Sounders] <etc>
<etc>
[TimeSlot]
~
[DelayBlk]
~
[AuxRly]
<etc> [Build]
[E] [C] [Q]

{ Params
1-100 }
[Log]
[Test]
{ Params
0-15 }
[E] [C] [Q]

{ Params
1-255 }
[E]
{ Params
} [E]
1-255
[Node]
[E]
{ Params
0-15 }
[P] [N] [Q]
[Sector]
~
{ Params
}
1-32
[P] [N] [Q]

[Card] <etc> [Zone]
~
[Group]
~
[Network]
[DelayLink]
~
{ Params
} [Loop]
1-32
[Loop]
{ Params
} [E] [C] [Q]
1-128
{ Params
} [Loop]
1-207
[MGroup]
{ Params
}
0-15
1-8
{ Params
} [E] [C] [Q]
1-255
10
15
15
{ Params
} [E] [C] [Q]
1-2
{ Params
} [E] [C] [Q]
1-2
<etc> [DST]
~ - These menu options are not applicable

at a Network node.
<etc>
[E] [C] [Q]
{ Params
} [E] [C] [Q]
1-8
[MSector]
[MSLink]
<etc>
[Message]
[E] [C] [Node]
{ Params
} [E] [C] [Q] { Params }
1-8
1-255
{ Params
} [E] [C] [Domain]
1-255
108
<etc> [SectLink]
~
[E] [C] [Q]
Default
Sig1 65 00 65 00 65 00 65 00
Sig2 4F 25 4F 25 4F 25 4F 25
Sig3 4F 00 4F 00 4F 00 4F 00
[E]
Access level 2a
[Device]
~
{ Params
}
1-16
[Config] [Start]
[E] [Card]
[E] [C] [Q]
[Card]
[Device]
{ Params
} [Loop]
0-15
1-207
{ Params
} [E] [C] [Q]
1-8
[Global]
<etc>
[E] [C] [Q]

Key
[E] = [Enter]
[C] = [Cancel]
[Q] = [Quit]
[P] = [Previous]
[N] = [Next]

V3.97 or higher
[Test/Eng] Menu map 1 [Control] [Set Up] [Info]

[Test/Eng]
[UserCode]
[Loop]
~
see Test/Eng
menu map 2-1
Access level 3
[Card]
[Config]
<etc>
[Test]
[Remote]+ <etc> [Comms] [Global] [Routing] <etc>
[Message]
[PSU]
[FreeBlok]
[Previous] [Next] [E]
{ Params
}
1-255
[Enter]
{ Params
}
1-255
[Datalog]
[Test]
[R]
[E] [C] [Q]

{ Params
0-15 }
[E] [C] [Q]
[Off]
~
[E] [C] [Q]
{ Params
}
1-255
[E] [C] [Q]

{ Params
0-15 }
[E] [C] [Q]
{ Params
} [E] [C] [Q]
0-15
Access level 2b
[Clear]
[Fault]
[Warning] [SubFault]
[E] [Card]
{ Params
}
0-15
[E]
[NewPass]
[Buzzer]
[All]
[Node]
Enter an
access code
<etc>
{ Params
1-128 }
[Sensors]
[All Dev]
[E] [C] [Q]

[Warning] [Fault] [Fire] <etc> [Supervis] [Build] <etc>
[P] [N] [Q]
Mns DC
Displayed on 4/6 Loop panel with PSU at V1.00
[Off] [On]
[Comms]
see Test/Eng
menu map 2-2
[Display]
[Delayblk] <etc> [Bypass]
~ - These menu options are not applicable for a Network node
[Off]
[Delay]
<etc>
Params
MM-SS
0-10
} [E] [C] [Q]
[P] [N] [E]
[P] [N] [E]
Range 0-31
(default 15)
[Off] [On]
[E] [C] [Q]
English - Espanol - Portugues - Cestina - Brazilian
[Off] [On]
~
[Flashing]
~
[E] [C] [Q]
[Co-incid]
~
[Contrast] [Zone]
[Off/On]
[E] [C] [Q]
[E] [C] [Q]
Bt1 BC1 Bt2 BC2 MA1 MA2 Ear Lpv

206 206 0
0
74 74
60 221
4 Loop panel 214 141
[E] [C] [Q]
{ Params
} [E]
1-255
[No Silence]
{ Params
} [E] [C] [Q]
0-3
[Language] [Label] <etc>
~long labels
[Zone]
~
[No Reset]
/ [Reset]
[E] [C] [Q]

{ Params
1-128 }
Typical values:
[1] [2] [Both]
[On]
~
[Zone]
[Card] [Port]
[NVM Card]
[No Silence]
[E] [C] [Q]
[On/Off]
[Enter] [Domain]
{ Params
} [E] [C] [Q]
0-15
[On/Off] [No Reset]
[Q] [Off] [On]
Off Controller Card 1 to 15
[Update]#
[Init]
[Domain]
<etc>
[Commissn]
~
AL2b
Access level 2b
[Reset]
[Network]

[Option]
Access level 2a
[DispTest]
[Zone]
[Group]
[E] [C] [Q]

Key
[E] = [Enter]
[C] = [Cancel]
[Q] = [Quit]
[P] = [Previous]
[N] = [Next]
109

[Test/Eng] Menu map 2
Access level 1
Test/Eng
menu map 2-1
[Loop]
Access level 3
[Allocate] [Stop]
<etc>
[FindDev]
{Params
}
1-8
[Gain]
[Flame]
[Start]
{ Params
0-7 }
{Params
} [E] [C] [Q]
1-8
{Params
1-207 }
[E] [C] [Q]
{ Params
}
1-207
[Device]
[Loop]
[Align]
{ Params
}
1-207
{Params
1-207 }
[Device]
[Loop]
Test/Eng
menu map 2-2
[Comms]
Access level 3
{ Params
} [E] [C] [Q]
0-15
Card 0 (MCC/MCB)
[Address]
{Params
}
1-8
{Params
} [Device]
0-6
[Loop]
{ Params
1-207 }
{ Params
} [E] [C] [Q]
1-8
[Repair]
<etc>
{ Params
} [Loop]
1-8
[E] [C] [Q]
Access level 2b
[Loop]
{Params
1-207 }
{Params
}
1-8
[E] [C] [Q]
[N] [P] [E]

Gain clock period 50008
{ Params
} [E] [C] [Q]
0-255
for other cards
[Baud]
[Baud]
[N] [P] [E]

RS232 Port 0 - Std - Off
USB Port 1 - Std - Off
110
[PreFire] [Fire] [SupFire]
[Loop]
[E] [C] [Q]
[Simulate]
[Domain]
{ Params
} [E] [C] [Q]
1-255
0-3 } [E] [C] [Q]

{ Params
PORT
[Mode]
<etc>
[Device]
{Params
1-207 }
[Beam]
{ Params
0-63 }
[AutoGain]
{ Params
} [E] [C] [Q]
1-8
1-8
[Card]
[N] [P] [E]

MCC
As Switches
50
!
600
1200
1800
2400
3600
4800
7200
9600
19200
38400
57600
115200
230400
460800
Factory default Port settings

with Control Panel having:
MCC
Port 0
Port 1
Key
[E] = [Enter]
[C] = [Cancel]
[Q] = [Quit]
[P] = [Previous]
[N] = [Next]
This appendix lists all the messages that are likely to be displayed at the Vigilon control panel /
Network Node. There are some fault events that are not self clearing and will require manual
intervention.
Repairable fault events

Repairable fault events are those that require manual intervention to clear the fault, for example
after following tests:
Loop (partial) short circuit.
Clearable fault events
Ground break
The following faults are identified as clearable fault events.

FLASH corrupt
How to clear a repairable fault event
Invalid device configuration
To repair the fault at the control panel press the Menu on/Off button -> [Test/Eng] -> [UserCode]
-> enter your PIN (where necessary) -> [Loop] -> <etc> -> <etc> -> [Repair] -> [Loop] -> enter
the loop number on which the fault resides -> [Enter].
Too many errors
Message Action list
Can be cleared but will not reset the counters.
Unrecoverable Tx fault
Checksum error
FLASH Configuration data and FLASH in sensors
NVM recovery failures or map mis-match

How to clear a clearable fault event
To clear the fault at the control panel press the Menu on/Off button -> [Test/Eng] -> [UserCode]
-> enter your PIN (where necessary) -> <etc> -> [Config] -> [Clear] -> [Fault] -> [Enter], then
scroll through to the fault you wish to clear and select [clear].
Latching fault events
The messages displayed at the control panel, network node or loop repeat panels are given here in
an alphanumerical order to provide guidance:
on a 'fault message'
the likely meaning of the message

along with suggestions on what initial actions may be taken to rectify the problem.
"
Only the messages that are applicable will appear on the display of the control
panel, network node or loop repeat panels. Additionally the display will identify the panel
where the event was first detected.
The term device was previously referred to as outstation.
The following faults are identified as latching events.

Slave devices lost
Loop allocation fault

Invalid loop configuration
How to clear a latching fault event
To clear a latching fault it is necessary to re-allocate the loop circuit.
111
Appendix B - Message Action List
associated with..
meaning..
..possible action
A spurious FIRQ at
card x
MCC / MCB
(main control card/board)
There is glitch on the MCC hardware that appears on

the backplane / MCB.
Clear and ignore single occurrence.
A spurious IRQ at
card x
MCC / MCB
There is glitch on the MCC / MCB hardware.
A spurious NMI at
card x
MCC / MCB
A spurious SWI2 at
card x
MCC / MCB
There is glitch on the MCC hardware.
A spurious SWI3
at card x
MCC / MCB
Access fault at
card x
Any Card
Card cannot talk to the MCC / MCB local controller.
Replace card if the fault keeps reoccurring.

Could also be caused by excessive network
messages. Investigate message passing.
ACIA Failed at
card x
Network Card or
MCC / MCB
Communication chip failure or the FABs and SABs are

corrupt.
Reset the card and replace if it fault keeps

reoccurring.
Alarm Zone Disabled /

Enabled at
card x
LPC
(loop processor card)
Alarms silenced
MCC / MCB
Silence alarms button has been pressed.
Alarms sounded
MCC / MCB
Sound alarms button has been pressed.
Alarms Verified
MCC / MCB
Alarms verify button has been pressed.
Allocation : memory
Overflow at card x
number y on loop z
LPC
Loop processor has run out of memory during

allocation / when starting a loop.
Software error or more likely a faulty RAM

chip.
Message
112
associated with..
meaning..
..possible action
Allocation : Double
Allocated
card x
number y on
loop z
LPC
Two devices are given the same address. Loop breaker

(relay contacts) are fused micro welded together
(closed) or there is a bad connection.
Check the device wiring. The device may be

faulty, replace if required.
Allocation : Hw fault
card x
number y on
loop z
LPC
Loop breaker relay has not closed or serial line End-2

is faulty or relay is stuck i.e. closed. The device may
not be correctly fitted.
Check the device wiring. The device may be

faulty, replace if required.
Allocation : Map
error card x
number y on
loop z
LPC
Loop wiring is incorrect, eg a sub loop may have been

wired on a spur.
Check and rewire if necessary. This fault

can also be device failure.
Allocation : not
ready at Card x
LPC
An attempt to allocate a loop when it is already

allocating.
Wait and if it takes longer than 10 minutes

then reset the loop card.
Allocation : OK at
Card n : Allocated x
LPC
The loop circuit has been successfully allocated.
Allocation : Too many

card x
number y on
loop z
LPC
Allocated more than 200 devices or the device is

restricted for use with the particular software version.
Replace incompatible devices used on other

systems ie:32000 or SMS device found in
system.
Allocation : Tx fault
card x
number y on
loop z
LPC
Invalid reply from the device.
Check the device. Also check cable routing

and length (measure resistance and
capacitance of cable).
Allocation started
from
end 2 at Card x
LPC
No devices found on End-1 or End 1 of the loop is

open circuit.
Check the wiring to the first device or last

device on the loop.
ASCII Device is
faulty number x on
loop y
LPC
Failure of the Control panel to communicate with

Repeat / Mimic panel. The power supplies to these
panels may not be connected.
If applicable, connect the power supply or

RESET the Master Repeat Card in the
Repeat and Mimic panel. If necessary
replace the card/software.
Message
113
associated with..
meaning..
..possible action
Back up
NVM
(non volatile memory) on
backplane or MCB
Data is being copied from cards and stored onto the

NVM.
Back up required
NVM
backplane or MCB
Data must be saved to memory
Back up data to the memory.
Battery discharged
Power supply
This indicates the failure of battery load test. The ADC

value should be equal to or less than normal - 9.
Check load test and the battery condition.
Battery disconnected/
restored
Power supply
A disconnection is indicated when the ADC value from

the battery is equal to or less than 130.
Normally it should be = 234 (27.4V)

To give a restored indication the ADC value
should = Vbatt 1/6x256/5.
Baud rate x at Card y
MCC / MCB / Network Card
Baud rate set has been read.
If required, change the baud rate.
being Initialised at
Card x
NVM
backplane or MCB
Memory is being set up by the MCC / MCB (main

control card/board), ready for use.
Buffer full at card x
Any Card
Software error.
Buffers out of step

at card x
Any Card
Software error.
Software errors will activate a system reset.
Message
Ignore single occurrence. Record the event

in the log book.
Call point glass is
broken
number x loop y
Device
Call point has been operated when the device is

disabled.
Replace the glass, if necessary.
Call point on
interface unit
operated/
restored
Device
Mains powered interface input has been triggered by

conventional MCP, value of input is equal to or less
than 6V.
Call point open cct

number x on loop y
Device
Monitored base does not see end-of-line unit. There is

a bad connection to MCP.
Check the internal wiring, there may be a

loose connection.
114
associated with..
meaning..
..possible action
Call point
operated/restored
number x
loop y
Device
Break glass has been broken or operated with a test

key.
Replace the break glass to restore the call

point or remove the test key, whichever is
applicable.
Call point short cct

number x loop y
Device
Call point contacts are short circuit.
Check the call point contacts and internal

wiring.
Card found/lost at
card x
Any Card
The card has been found/lost. If lost then it is locked

out.
There may be a hardware fault on card or

backplane. Investigate and rectify.
Card n recovered
/Card n backed up
NVM
backplane or MCB
Data recovered to a card from the NVM. A card data

has been backed up to the NVM.
Chamber Removed
/Replaced number x on
loop y
Device
Device chamber has been removed.
Replacing the chamber will cause a replaced

indication.
Charger Fault
Panel
Power Supply Unit (PSU)
Charger circuit has failed.
Replace the PSU.
Charger Fault number

x on
loop y
EN54 System device power

supply
(Repeat, Mimic or mains
powered interface)
Charger circuit has failed at a loop device.
Replace the board (having the power supply)

on the loop device.
Charger Restored
Panel power supply
Charger circuit is working again.
Charger Restored
number x on
loop y
EN54 System device power

supply
(Repeat, Mimic or mains
powered interface).
Charger circuit at the loop device is working again.
Chk=4.874 NVMC 41874

Flag=0
NVM is write
protected at Card x
NVM
backplane or MCB
The memory is read only.
Disable the write protect using the [set up]

menu.
Clock changed / Clock

not set up
MCC / MCB
Time and date has been altered or no time has been

entered.
If necessary, set the clock using the set up

menu.
Message
115
associated with..
meaning..
..possible action
CO sensor faulty
Device
There is a fault with the CO sensor in an S-Quad.
Replace device
CO sensor near end of

life
Device
The CO cell is nearing the end manufacturer

recommended life expectancy in an S-Quad.
Replace the device
CO sensor restored
Device
The CO sensor fault has been restored in an S-Quad
Command build
activated/deactivated
MCC / MCB
Command build has been switched ON (activated) or

switched OFF (deactivated).
If necessary switch ON/OFF the command

build using the [control] menu.
Command build enabled

/ disabled
MCC /MCB
This is an automatic or manually controlled action.
If necessary, manually enable/disable the

command build using the [control] menu.
Comms
Enabled/Disabled at
card x
MCC / MCB
Card communications have been enabled or disabled.

Comms using the [control] menu
Network Card
Control panel has been isolated from the network.
Comms Supply Fault
Network node
The communications power supply has failed.
Replace the power supply unit.
Comms supply Restored
Network node
The communications power supply has been restored.
Communications
started/stopped at
Card x
MCC / MCB
Communication to a particular panel or to external

equipment linked to the panel (eg Laptop having the
commissioning tool) has started / stopped.
Check the wiring.
Control passed
Card x
Network
Corrupted NVM memory

at card x
Any Card
Checksum failure on configuration at midnight.
Recover data and record event in the log

book. If it reoccurs then replace the card.
DC Power fail /
restored
Power supply
The ADC of output 27V regulator

Normal=146(28.5V).
DC too high / DC too

low
Power supply
The DC supply is:
Check the mains supply and battery wiring.
Message
at
Too high if greater than 164 (32V)

Too low if less than 102 (20V)
116
associated with..
meaning..
..possible action
Delay block setup
MCC / MCB
A Delay Block has been configured.
Delay blocks Cleared
MCC / MCB
Detection Zone
Disabled/Enabled at
card x
LPC
The detection zone has been enabled or disabled

automatically or manually.

detection zone using the [control] menu.
Detector on interface
unit number x on
loop y channel z
Device
Conventional detector connected to an input of a mains

powered interface input has triggered. Value of the
input is equal to or less than 10V.
Device Address
changed from x number
y on loop z
Device
Device SAFE address has changed.
If necessary rectify the device SAFE

address.
Device battery fault

/restored
Device
The battery has failed the load test at the device, for a
mains powered interface the value is equal to or less
than normal - 2V.
Check and replace the battery if necessary.
Device Battery OC
number x on loop y
Device
Failure of fuse or battery wiring is OC on products like

mains powered interface unit.
Check and replace if necessary to restore.
Message
Normal value = 27.4V

Value is equal to or less than 16V (OC) / greater than
17V (Restored).
Device Enabled /
Disabled at
Card x
LPC
Device has been enabled or disabled manually or

automatically.
If necessary manually enable or disable the

device.
Device Fault number x

on loop y
ACU
Audio Control Unit
Fault input has been asserted.
Check remote equipment wired to the fault

input.
Device Gain set to x

number y on loop z
Beam devices
(can also be a Flame device no longer supported)
Confirmation of a change in gain setting.
117
associated with..
meaning..
..possible action
Device Mains too high

/ low number x loop y
Devices like: Mimic / Repeat

/ Mains powered interface
unit
Failure of device mains supply.

The value of rectified DC is too high / low i.e in the
region of 30V / 17V.
Check the power supply and replace it if

necessary
Device power Fault /

Restored number x on
loop y
Device
The failure of internal power supply rail.
Replace the device.
Device power
too high/
restored too low
/restored
number x on
loop y
Device
Internal power rail of mains powered interface unit has

a value of rectified DC equal to or greater than 32V
(high) / less than 30V (restored)
DC equal to or less than 24V (low) / greater than 26V
(restored)
Replace the device
Device Replaced is
faulty
number x on
Loop y
LPC
Tx fault re-finding device.
Check connections to device / base and also

device type etc.
Device Replaced
number x loop y
LPC
The replaced device is now communicating with the

panel.
Device soft address;

SAFE: number x on
loop y
Device
Device primary address does not match SAFE address.
Check loop configuration.
Device Mains Failed /

Restored number x
loop y
Device
Failure of mains supply to mimic/repeat /mains

powered interface unit. The value of rectified DC is
equal to or less than 8V i.e. failed.
Check mains supply connections and the

mains fuse. When the rectified DC is
greater than 24V it is restored.
Disables Cleared
MCC / MCB
All disablements have been removed from the panel.
Duplicate SAFE
Address error:
number x on
loop y
Device
Two devices on a loop have the same SAFE address.
Change one of the SAFE address.
Message
118
associated with..
meaning..
..possible action
Earth Fault/ Fault

Cleared
Power supply
The ADC value to earth of the 8V regulator:

is equal to or greater than 5 (for a +ve fault)
or less than 3 ( for a -ve fault).
A clear indication is normally given when

ADC is equal to 64.
Enabled Aux relay x

Disabled Aux relay x
MCC / MCB
The auxiliary relay has been enabled or disabled


auxiliary relays using the [control] menu.
End switching normal

at card x
Network
Network card is back to normal operation, (see also

end switching disabled)
Exception number x on
loop y
(Exceptions also referred to

as Sub-Fault)
Loop Processor Card
Change noted in the environment of the device
Check the condition codes.
Excessive
transmission error
rate
LPC
There were more than 10 reply errors in one day.
Check screening and electrical noise in area

of operation + check loose connections to
loop.
External Fire at
panel n
MCC / MCB
There is a Fire on another panel in a network.
Investigate the fire.
Fast scan started

number x on loop y
channel z
Data logging
Fire sensor has detected a change on its input.
The message is normally given when the

data logger is connected.
Fault cleared Warning

cleared
MCC / MCB
Fault or warning has now gone.
Fire number n loop y

channel z
LPC
Pattern match is equal to a Fire or MCP operated or

conventional detection on IO line of interface operated.
Fire reset
MCC / MCB
The Fire reset button has been pressed.
Flash memory checksum

error
Device
Speech Memory Checksum Error
Replace the device
Message
(More than 16 reply errors will cause the device

isolation.)
Too many errors: lost

device or loop split
119
associated with..
meaning..
..possible action
Full keyboard Removed

/ Fitted number x
loop y
MCC/ MCB / DKC/ MRC
The keyboard has been removed (is not fitted).
Check the cable connections to the keyboard

to bring about the fitted message.
Group Enabled /
Disabled
MCC / MCB
A group has been automatically or manually disabled

or enabled.

group using the [control] menu.
High Error rate at

Card x
Network
High number of communication errors.
Check network wiring and connections.
Incompatible Card
Version at card x
Any Card
There is a card software conflict.
Fit card with compatible software.
Interface Failed at
Card x
MCC / MCB
The interface timer chip has failed.
Clear the fault and ignore single occurrence.

Replace the card on multiple failures.
Interface input fault / restored

number x on
loop y channel z
Device
IO line fault.
Check the wiring and restore the input for

normal operation.
Interface Input Fire

number x on loop y
channel z
Device
Interface IO line triggered a fire event.
Check the wiring and restore the input for

normal operation.
Interface input not

Reset number x on
loop y channel z
Device
The input line continues to trigger.
Check devices on the IO line.
Interface Input OC /
restored
Device
The end-of-line is not seen.
Check the wiring. The device may have

been removed, if so refit the device to
restore.
Interface input
operated / released
number x on loop y
channel z
Device
Fixed extinguishant interface unit input has been

triggered (applicable for old systems only).
Follow the FE system reset procedure to

release the input.
Interface input SC /
restored number x on
loop y channel z
Device
The interface wiring is short circuit. The value of input

is equal to or less than 2V.
Check the interface wiring and rectify to

restore the input.
Message
120
associated with..
meaning..
..possible action
Interface output SC
or OC or Restored
number x on loop y
channel y
Device
The value of output is equal to or less than 50% for SC

or is TBA for OC.
Check the wiring and restore the output

circuit.
Intermittent Fault at
card x
Any Card
A fault has been picked up by the MCC / MCB (main

control card/board).
Replace the appropriate card if the fault

keeps reoccurring.
Invalid configuration
LPC
Loop recovered with freeblocks ON.
This is not allowed. Switch OFF the

freeblocks and reallocate.
Device
FLASH incorrectly programmed
Replace the device
Invalid configuration
at card x
LPC
Loop recovered with freeblocks ON or Loop

configuration faulty, possibly after upload from
Commissioning Tool.
This is not allowed. Switch OFF the

freeblocks and reallocate.
Invalid message /
reply received at
card x
LPC
The message/reply received cannot be understood. The

communication can be from a Repeat, Mimic,
Networked system.
Ignore single occurrence and record in the

log book.
Invalid message/reply
at card x
Network Card
The message/reply has not been understood from other

panels.
Ignore for single occurrence and record in

the log book.
Invalid task delay at

card x
Any Card
Software error.
Message

in the log book.
Invalid task stage
Any Card
Software error.

in the log book.
IO line Enabled /
Disabled at Card x
LPC
The IO line is either enabled or disabled automatically

or manually.
If necessary, manually enable/disable the IO

line using the [control] menu.
Loop map has changed

card x
LPC
The map is different to that previously allocated.
Check and confirm difference with backup

map.
121
associated with..
meaning..
..possible action
Loop power restored
Power supply
Normal loop supply restored:

Normal ADC = 202 (44V).
Value = Vsupp x 1/11X256/5.
Loop Started not

ready at card x
number y loop z
LPC
As per message.
Wait and if it takes longer than

10 minutes then reset the loop card.
Loop stopped at Card

x
Loop Processor Card
The loop has been aborted or is still being allocated.
Re-allocate the loop.
Loop voltage too

high/low
Power supply
The ADC value too high.
Check PSU values in the [test/eng] menu,

normal reading is 221. Check fuses and
replace PSU if necessary.
Message
or
The ADC value is too low.

Lost Command
number x on
Loop y
LPC
Lost FAB/SAB.
Ignore single occurrence and record in the

log book.
Lost Device number x

on loop y
LPC
There is no reply on ends 1&2 of the device.
Check the device connections.
Lost slave Device

number x on loop y
LPC
There is no reply on ends 1&2 of the device.
Check the slave device connections and

replace if necessary.
Magnetic switch
operated
number x loop y
Device
The reset switch in the base has closed for 3400

devices only.
Check base and proximity of magnetic field.
Main program not

running at
card x
Any Card
Problem with software. The watchdog will operate the

MCC / MCB (main control card/board).

Ignore single occurrence.
Record event in the log book.
Mains failed /
restored
122
Power supply
Failure is detected when the ADC output from the

rectifier is equal to or less than 105.
Check mains and fuse. Replace PSU if

necessary. This should normally equal to
60V to get a restored message.
associated with..
meaning..
..possible action
Mains too high
Power supply
The ADC value is too high.
Mains too low
Power supply
Mains supply is too low.
Check the PSU values in the [test eng]

menu. Replace PSU if necessary.
Master alarm
Power supply
No end-of-line unit seen.

ADC value is greater than 92
or
ADC value is less than 37
oc
or
sc
Check the wiring to the master alarm

circuits. Ensure EOLs are connected inside
the control panel if master alarm circuits are
not used.
ADC value is 74
Restored
Master alarm
enabled/disabled
MCC / MCB
The master alarm has been enabled or disabled

Master alarm restored
Power supply
Master alarm fault cleared.

The ADC value should be 74.
Master polling/not
polling at
card x
MCC / MCB
PC or SRI (service request interface) is not

handshaking with the control panel
Check the wiring
Master Sector
Actioned
MCC / MCB
Master sector has been switched ON/OFF.
Master Sector
Enabled/Disabled
MCC / MCB
Master sector has been enabled or disabled manually or

automatically.
If necessary manually enable or disable the

master sector.
Memory corrupt number

x loop y
Device
FLASH checksum failure
Replace the device
Message discarded
Network Card
LPC
Message received that couldnt be routed or

understood.
Check the location displayed, try resetting

card.
Neighbour ACK Failed

at card n
Repeated address
Check domain addresses are unique
Neighbour ACK Invalid

at
card n
TBA
TBA
TBA
If necessary, manually enable or disable the

master alarm using the [control] menu.
Message
123
associated with..
meaning..
..possible action
Network initialised
at Card x
Network Card
Successful network map with polled panels.
Network Insecure /
Secure at
Card x
Network Card
There are 3 missing replies in a row on End-2 of the

controller.
Check the wiring.

Check the error rate.
Network starting at
Card x
Network Card
Communication starting with other connected panels.
Network wiring fault

at card x
Network Card
Wiring is presumed to be OC between

panel n and panel n.
Check the wiring.
New address n at card

x
MCC / MCB
Network Card
The new address set has been read.
New domain address n

at Card x
Network Card
The new address set been read at the particular card.
NMIs missed at card

x
LPC
Software error.
Any Card
Problem with software, the watchdog will operate the

Message
No periodic
interrupts at card x

in the log book.
Software error will activate a system reset.
Ignore single occurrence. Record event in
the log book.
No response number x
loop y
LPC
There is no communication with repeat or mimic panel

software.
Power-up the repeat or mimic panel.
No room on NVM card
NVM
backplane or MCB
User attempts to backup or save to an NVM that does

not have enough free space
If there is no memory left then the card 14

located on the Backplane or on
MCB (Card 0) needs to be initialised
Node double allocated

at card x
Network Card
Two network cards have same address.
Keep address unique.
Node found at Card x
Network Card
Another panel on the network acknowledged.
124
associated with..
meaning..
..possible action
Node lost/restored at
Card x
Network Card
There have been 15 missing replies from another panel.
Check the wiring or check and reset the

panel Network card to restore.
Not enough RAM at

card x
Any Card
Not enough memory.
Reset the card and ignore single occurrence.

If necessary replace the card or add RAM,
where applicable.
Nothing found at Card

x
LPC
No devices found on End 1 or End 2.
Check wiring of loop circuit.
NVM initialised
NVM
(non volatile memory)on
backplane or MCB
Memory available verified.
NVM is not write

protected
NVM
backplane or MCB
Read and write is possible to the memory card.
Enable protect if required using the [set up]

menu.
NVM is read only
NVM
backplane or MCB
User attempts to write to a hardware write protected

NVM
Remove the hardware write protect before

writing
Panel in/out of
commissioning mode
MCC / MCB
Commissioning mode switched ON/OFF.
To manually switch commissioning mode

use the [test/eng] menu.
Panel Label Set up
MCC / MCB
Panel label has been set from the menu.
Panel powerup
MCC / MCB
Software reset of system or there has been a manual

reset of card 0.
If an automatic reset has occurred then

check for system errors.
Pattern
number x on loop y
channel x
LPC
Sensor has detected an interesting event eg fire/fault.
Pointer corrupted at
Card x
Any Card
Software error.
Message
Ignore single occurrence.

Record the event in the log book.
125
Message
Pointer missing at
card x
associated with..
meaning..
..possible action
Any Card
Software error
Software errors will cause a system reset.

Card fault should be ignored for single
occurrence.
Record the event in the log book.

Prefire number x on
loop y channel z
LPC
Pattern match less than a Fire.
Printer lost/fitted
at card x number y on
loop z
MCC / MCB / DKC / MRC
The external printer has not been seen and is lost.
Check the connections to the printer. Also

check for paper jam in the printer
mechanism.
Program memory
corrupted at card x
Any Card
Checksum failure on FLASH at midnight.

Record in the log book.
Program not running

at Card x
Any Card
Problem with software, the watchdog will operate the

Software errors will activate an automatic

system reset.
Ignore for single occurrence.
Record event in the log book.
Program runaway at
card x
Any Card
CPU has crashed.
Clear and ignore single occurrence. Record

in the log book.
Q buffer full at
card x
Any Card
Software error.

in the log book.
Any Card
Q buffer number
Failed at card x
Software error.

in the log book.
Recover failed
Card x
126
at
LPC
Loop does not match with what is in NVM.
Check and confirm/correct the difference

and then backup.
associated with..
meaning..
..possible action
Recover succeeded at
card x
LPC
Successful recovery after a previous failure.
Replaced Device Wrong

type number x on loop
y
LPC
Device is a different type.
Check and confirm installation of correct

type and reallocate. Back up to memory.
SAFE Address not Set

up number x on loop y
LPC
The replaced device is not SAFE addressed. The

device previously installed in the location was SAFE
addressed.
Set up the SAFE address.
Scan error number x

at
card y
LPC
Invalid universal scan reply.
Check loop length and screening
Sector actioned
LPC
Sector is switched ON/OFF.
Sector Enabled/
Disabled at card x
LPC
The sector(s) has been enabled or disabled


sector using the [control] menu.
Sensor out of
specification number
x on Loop y Channel z
LPC
Fault pattern has been matched.
Check and replace the sensor if necessary.
Shared memory
hardware is faulty at
Card x
Any Card
There is MCC / MCB problem.
Replace all other cards first other than the

MCC/MCB to see if the problem is resolved.
Message
If it persists then replace MCC / MCB.

Slave Device
Replaced
number x on loop y
LPC
Slave type device has been replaced.
Slave micro failed at

Card x
LPC
Loop driver is watchdogged by loop processor.
Reset and ignore single occurrence. Record

in the log book.
Software errors
Software errors will activate

a system reset
Software error

in the log book.
127
associated with..
meaning..
..possible action
Sounder circuit
failed
Device
There is a fault with the sounder hardware on the

S-Cubed or S-Quad.
Replace the device
Sounder circuit
Restored
Device
The fault is on the sounder circuit associated with

S-Quad or S-Cubed has been restored.
Speech circuit has

failed
Device
There is a hardware fault possibly associated with the

voice chip on the speech S-Cubed or S-Quad
Replace the device
Speech circuit
Restored
Device
The fault on the speech S-Quad and S-Cubed has been

restored.
Spurious
acknowledgment at
card x
Any Card
Software error.
Spurious FAB Number x

on Loop y
LPC
Device has FAB but shouldnt have any.
Ignore single occurrence as the panel will

remove the indication.
Stack overflow at
card x
Any Card
Software error
Software errors will activate a system reset
Message

in the log book.

in the log book
Stack too deep at
card x
Any Card
Software error.

in the log book.
Strobe circuit has

failed
Device
The strobe circuit in the S-Quad or S-Cubed device has

failed.
Replace the device
Strobe circuit
restored
Device
The strobe hardware fault, such as internal connection,

in the S-Cubed or S-Quad has been restored
See exceptions
Sub Faults
Superfire number x on
loop y channel z
128
LPC
Pattern match is equal to or greater than a Fire.
associated with..
meaning..
..possible action
Supply totally Failed
MCC / MCB
The message does not normally appear.
Switching inhibited
at
end 1 at card x
Network
Automatic end swapping on the network controller has

been disabled for test purpose.
System Printer fitted

at card x number y
loop z
MCC / MCB
A 80 column serial printer is fitted to the panel.
System Printer Lost

at card x number y on
loop z
MCC / MCB (Printer option)
TBA
TBA
System Restarted
/Started
MCC / MCB
Link on back plane restored.
System stopped
MCC / MCB
Backplane link moved causing the system to stop.
The link should not be normally accessed.
Task stuck
Any Card
Software error.
Message
at card x

in the log book.
Test set found /
removed at
Card x
LPC
Remote allocation unit has been found connected to the

system.
Disconnection of the test set will bring about

a removed message.
Too many errors

number x on loop y
Device
More than 15 errors from a device in 34 hours.
Check the loop wiring to the device.
Too many errors x at

Card y
Network Card
Up to 6 consecutive communication errors.
Check wiring and cable screen. There may

be faults with the installation.
Two controller at
Card x
Network
There are two network controllers.
One network controller will automatically

shut down.
Two master has the

same address at
Card x
MCC / MCB / DKC
Two PCs have been given the same address.
Each PC must have a unique address.
129
associated with..
meaning..
..possible action
Unable to claim
buffers at
card x
Any Card
System too busy
Wait or reset card if stuck, record in the log

book
Unrecoverable Tx
fault
number x loop y
LPC
More than 3 consecutive reply errors
Check the device connections and replace if

necessary.
Warm restart
MCC/MCB
(main control card)
The 5V rail has seen a dip activating the watchdog or

the button has been pressed on MCC/MCB or panel
power reconnected.
Warning cleared
MCC / MCB
Warning has been removed.
Wiring changed ground break at card

x number y on loop z
LPC
A test has shown a break on the 0V line. The test is

conducted every minute.
Check wiring of 0V around loop.
Wiring changed short at

card x number y loop
z
LPC
Loop short circuit after the particular device.
Check wiring and device after indicated

device.
Wiring changed split/closed at Card

x number y on loop z
LPC
No reply received from a device at End-2 of loop.
Check wiring.
Wiring changed part

short at Card x
number y on loop z
LPC
Less than 80 ohms between the +ve and 0V of loop

wiring.
Check wiring and the device after the

partially shorted device.
Wrong card type at

Card x
Any Card
Card in wrong slot.
Move the cards to the right location.
Zone enabled /
disabled at
Card x
MCC / MCB
The zone has been enabled or disabled automatically or

manually.
If necessary, manually enable or disable the

zone using the [control] menu.
Message
130
This appendix provides guidance on factors that must be taken into consideration when applying
standalone system functions, such as:
labels
sectors (including flag set sectors)

delay blocks
time slots and time blocks
zones
groups
voice alarm zones
command builds
sounder configuration
auxiliary relays
Labels
Labels are given to identify location of areas on a site
A previously created label can be modified
"
Where manual call points are being used then each can only have a label of up
to 28 characters.
a 32 character label can be assigned to a:

device
(must have a label having 28 characters if it is an MCP)
each Input/Output line

(must have a label having 28 characters maximum if one or more MCPs are
installed on the input line)
zone
group
control panel
Input channel label
A supervisory input channel label of an interface unit will only be displayed at the
control panel of the standalone system.
By adding an * in front of the channel label it will allow the label to appear on all
the networked panels.
The networked panels must however be setup to display all events. In this
configuration the label will also be displayed at a network node and Central
monitoring system.
When an interface input is operated the standalone systems (local) control panel
buzzer can only be activated by configuring the input to trigger a command
build. In this case the command build should not have actions.
To activate buzzers of control panels in a network an * must be inserted before

the command build label.
131
Appendix C - Guidelines for standalone system commands
Appendix C - Guidelines for

standalone system commands
Long labels
Long labels having up to 64 characters can be given to devices and command builds. This is achieved by replacing commonly used words with token values (special codes). Tokenised labels :When
tokens are decoded, a trailing space is automatically added to the decoded word. Likewise when a label is being tokenised, the word must have a space following it, or be at the end of a line. Therefore
a token word cannot be followed with a comma, dash or other such character.
To switch on long labels: Press the Menu on/Off button -> [Test/Eng] -> [UserCode] -> enter your PIN (where necessary) -> <etc> -> [Config] -> <etc> -> [Label] -> [On] -> [Enter].
"
All tokenised labels are displayed in Upper case.
Banks 0, 1 and 2 show the list of tokens used by the software to reduce the character label to 32 characters or less.
Bank 0
General Building Features
AREA
ANNEXE
BLOCK
BUILDING
CORE
CORRIDOR
DOOR
DUCT
ENTRANCE
ESCALATOR
EXIT
EXTENSION
FLAT
HALL
HOUSE
LIFT
LOBBY
RISER
ROOM
ROUTE
STAIRS
TOWER
UNIT
VENTILATION
VOID
ZONE
Vertical Location
LEVEL
MEZZANINE
FLOOR
BASEMENT
GROUND
FIRST
SECOND
THIRD
FOURTH
CEILING
ROOF
ATRIUM
NORTH
SOUTH
EAST
WEST
NEAR
OUTSIDE
ABOVE
UPPER
CENTRE
LOWER
LEFT
RIGHT
FRONT
REAR
Geographic Location
Building Usage
ACCOMMODATION
ADMIN
BEDROOM
BOILER
CENTRAL
CHANGING
COMPUTER
CONTROL
CUPBOARD
ELECTRICAL
ENGINEERING
EXTERNAL
132
GARAGE
GENERAL
HOUSING
KITCHEN
LAUNDRY
LOUNGE
OFFICE
PLANT
RECEPTION
RESTAURANT
SERVICE
SERVICES
SHOP
STAFF
STORE
STORES
SWITCH
SYSTEM
TOILET
WORKSHOP
WARD
WAREHOUSE
GALLERY
Airport Tokens
AIR SIDE
ARRIVALS
BAGGAGE
BRIDGE
BUREAU DE CHANGE
CUSTOMS
CONCOURSE
DEPARTURES
DUTY FREE
EXCHANGE
GATE
HANDLING
IMMIGRATION
LANDSIDE
LUGGAGE
MALL
PASSENGER
RETAIL
SECURITY
STATION
TERMINAL
TRANSFER
Medical Tokens
MEDICAL
THEATRE
X-RAY
CLINIC
PATIENTS
PHYSIOTHERAPY
GERIATRICS
PAEDIATRICS
RECORDS
HEALTH
Components of the Fire System

SOUNDER
DETECTOR
OPTICAL
IONISATION
HEAT
INTERFACE
BEAM
REPEAT
FOYER
SHAFT
STAIRCASE
FIFTH
SIXTH
ATTIC
BALCONY
LANDING
PASSAGE
SUBWAY
TUNNEL
SPRINKLER
Bank 1
CHAMBER
STAIRWELL
Vertical Location
Positions
ADJACENT
BOTTOM
Building Usage
CATERING
COLLEGE
CONFERENCE
DEPARTMENT
DISPATCH
EMERGENCY
EQUIPMENT
ESCAPE
MANAGER
MEETING
PACKING
PHYSICS
133
POINT
PREPARATION
SHOPPING
SITTING
STATIONERY
SUITE
SUPPLY
TELEPHONE
BONDED
CHECK-IN
CLORIFIER
TRANSFORMER
Airport Tokens
AIRLINES
CONVEYOR
CUL-DE-SAC
DOMESTIC
FORECOURT
INFORMATION
INTERCONNECTOR
INTERNATIONAL
RECLAIM
SCREENING
SECRET SIGN
TRAVOLATOR
TRUCKING
INPUT
OUTPUT
PRESSURE
BLOWER
CHUTE
DOORS
HOIST
ROLLER
SLUICE
UNDER
MIDDLE
Medical Tokens
DISPENSARY
Components of the Fire System

ASPIRATING
SHUTTER
Bank 2
Position
BEHIND
BELOW
Building usage
BISTRO
BUSINESS
CANTEEN
CHILLER
CLASS
CLASSROOM
CLEANERS
DISABLED
ELECTRONICS
FACTORY
FEMALE
LIBRARY
LOCKER
MAINTENANCE
MOTOR
MUSIC
NURSERY
PHASE
QUIET
SEATING
SHOWER
STORAGE
TENANT
VEHICLE
VOLTAGE
WALKWAY
Airport token
APRON
AUTOWALK
BOARDING
CABIN
CONNECTOR
CRAFT
DEPARTURE
FLIGHT
STAND
TOUCHDOWN
134
a sector can be configured to give one of three signals

Signal 1 Alert (priority 3)
Signal 2 Evacuate (priority 2)
Signal 3 Continuous (priority 1)
Sectors
* I/O LINES MAY BE SECTORED INDIVIDUALLY FOR STANDARD MAINS POWERED
INTERFACE UNITS AND NOT FOR LOOP POWERED INTERFACE UNITS.
DEVICES
& I/O LINES
WITHIN A
SECTOR
ASSIGN
COMMAND
BUILD
SIGNAL
O
O N
FF
SIGNAL
ON
OFF
ACTION
ON
OFF
DELAY
BLOCK
SIGNAL
3
SIGNAL
32 SECTORS
PER LOOP
O
O N
FF
SIGNAL
ON
OFF
COMMAND
BUILD
ACTION
ON
OFF
NOTE : SECTORS 29 TO
32 ARE FOR
SPECIAL USE
SECTOR
SIGNAL
3
SECTOR
1
O
O N
FF
SIGNAL
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ACTION
SIGNAL
3
AUX
RELAYS
ACTION
SIGNAL
ALL
SIGNALS
OFF
SECTOR
That has just
come into fire
ACTION
ACTION
SETUP THE SECTOR

TO DE-ENERGIZE ON
SILENCE ALARMS
OR RESET
BUTTON
on Sound Alarms button being pressed will be silenced

on operation of the Reset button
the sectors 29-32 are independent of the Sound Alarms
TRIGGER
1
ALL
SIGNALS
OFF
and Silence Alarms buttons
a sector (any one of 1-28) that is configured for NO action
DELAY
BLOCK
sectors 1-28 operate automatically with Sound Alarms
button and are primarily used for the control of plant

equipment. However, the sectors 29-30 can be configured
to normal sector operation.
sensors, call points and interface inputs may be assigned

to more than one sector.
ASSIGN
VOICE ALARM
ZONES
a loop powered interface is assigned to a sector and

consequently the inputs and outputs lines of that interface
will be assigned to the same sector.
ASSIGN
ALL
SIGNALS
OFF
MASTER
SECTOR
S-Quad having alarm sounder and interface outputs are

restricted to one sector only.
DEFAULT: SIGNAL-1 = ALERT

SIGNAL-2 = EVACUATE
NOTE : A SECTOR CAN ONLY ACTION OTHER LINKS

IF THE FIRE IS AT A DEVICE ASSIGNED TO THAT SECTOR.
SIGNAL-3 = CONTINUAL
NOTE: VOICE ALARM ZONES ARE PUSH BUTTON
CONTROLS ON THE MAIN PANEL.
There can be up to 32 sectors per loop

a sector is a collection of devices on the same loop having a common action.
Voice alarm panel there can be up to 10 Voice Alarm

Zones.
Voice alarm zone are push button switches on the Voice

alarm control panel that can be assigned to Sectors.
Any normal Sector (1-28) can be assigned to any voice

alarm zone (1-10)
a sector that is actioned ON will activate its alarm devices, such as interface outputs, S Cubed, S-Quad and DAU
devices.
135
Integral sounder operation

A sensor sounder device can have its integral sounder only actioned in the event of a local fire event being detected at the device.
Integral sounder sector operation (also called 'flag set' sector) can be configured using the panel menu commands [SetUp]-> [Sector] -> [Sounder] -> [On].
A sector configured for integral sounder operation will in the event of a fire at an optical heat sensor sounder device will operate ONLY its local sounder.
SECTOR X
OPERATION
SECTOR X
ONLY LOCAL
ALARM SOUNDS
SECTOR X
OHS
OHS
ACTION
Setup
FIRE
FLAG SET
INTEGRAL
ON - ON
SOUNDER
FIRE
NOTE: OTHER OPTICAL HEAT SOUNDERS

IN AN ÌNTEGRAL SOUNDER SECTOR' WILL
OPERATE IN A SIMILAR MANNER.
ACTION
MCP
MCP
INTERFACE
INTEGRAL
SOUNDER
FLAG
OFF
SET OFF
DEFAULT
(DEFAULT)
INTERFACE
ACTION
COMMAND
BUILD
DELAY
BLOCK
SECTOR
This action is only applicable
if the fire was from a non
OHS sensor
The sector x will operate normally when

actioned by another sector.
136
Default fire plan
Fail safe fire plan
The fire plan on power up is known as one out all out. This is when sector 1 is assigned
It is advisable to build a fail safe mechanism when sectoring. If for any reason
with all devices of the system. A fire will activate evacuate (signal 2) on all interface outputs
and alarm sounders of S-Quads, S-Cubed and DAU devices.
Fixed extinguishant inputs / outputs are automatically assigned to sector 29. Note the Fixed
extinguishing interface unit is no longer a part of the product range.
To assign a default fire plan
To manually configure the default fire plan using the set up menu:
Assign all device and IO lines to sector 1
and then action all sectors (except sectors 29-32) on all sectors to signal 2.
To remove the default fire plan.
If the system is not intended to operate with the default Fire Plan, then do exactly the same
as making the default fire plan, but this time replace the [Assign] with [Remove]. Also
remove IO lines.
All sensors, call points, sounders and interface lines are now completely separate from each
other.
certain sector assignments have been lost due to system power down and
subsequent NVM recovery conflict on system power up, the sounders will still
operate in the event of a fire.
the fail safe mechanism will involve leaving Sector 1 on each loop free from
any device assignment, as any devices that lose their sector assignment will
default to Sector 1.
the following action will give an evacuate tone to any alarm sounders that have
defaulted to Sector 1:
Action all sectors (except sectors 29-32)
on sector 1 to signal 2
Action sector 1 on all sectors to signal 2
Site specific fire plan

A site specific fire plan can be created by configuring sectors to site
requirement.
&
The use of monitored line off a sensor device having MCP is not allowed in the UK.
also [Deaction] all sectors on all sectors. This will remove any configured sector actions
a site specific Fire Plan can now be set up by assigning devices within common initiation
areas to sectors and then actioning them together to form the required Fire Plan.
137
There can be up to 16 delay blocks per panel
Delay Blocks
each delay block can provide a delay of between 4 seconds to 10 minutes
ACTION
(in 4 second increments) before starting a desired action
COMMAND
BUILD
A DELAY BLOCK
ACTIONED FROM A
COMMAND BUILD CAN
HAVE A SEPARATE
DELAY OF UP TO
10 MINUTES
SIGNAL
1
OF
ON
SET UP
SECTORS
ACTION
SIGNAL
2
ON
16 DELAY
BLOCKS
ACTION
SECTORS
OF
a delay block may be actioned by:

sectored fire event
command build
delay blocks
OFF
SIGNAL
3
PER-PANEL
ALL
SIGNALS
OFF
ACTION
10 MINS
MAX
a delay block can action:

sectors
delay blocks
NO
ACTION
if the required delay is beyond 10 minutes. This can be achieved by a delay

block actioning another delay block before the required action is taken
DELAY
BLOCK
ANOTHER
DELAY
BLOCK
NOTE : THIS CONFIGURATION IS POSSIBLE
NOTE: IF NO SECTORS ARE SET UP TO BE ACTIONED

BUT THERE IS A SIGNAL NUMBER SET UP AND THE
ORIGINAL TRIGGER WAS FROM A SECTOR, THEN
WHEN THE DELAY TIMES OUT THAT SECTOR WILL
BE ACTIONED.
138
"
If Delay Blocks are linked to produce a delay of longer than 10 minutes,

then the panel will no longer meet the requirements of EN54: Part 2:1997.
where a delay block is actioned by a command build, a different delay time is
ACTION
10 MINS
MAX
set up (within the command build entry line).
each time slot has to be given an Enable time and a
Time slots and time blocks

MAX. 16 PER PANEL
MAX. 15 PER PANEL
TIMESLOT 1
TIMEBLOCK 1
ACTION
SETUP
each time slot must be ANDed / ORed to the days of

week, (Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, Fri, Sat Sun).
Zone
ENABLE / DISABLE TIMESLOT
COMMAND
BUILD
SETUP
0 - 24 hrs
DELAYED BY
TIMESLOT 1
SETUP
TIMESLOT 2
ENABLE TIME
08:00
DISABLE TIME
TIME
AND/OR
DAYS SETUP
17:00
DAYS
:
THU
OR
(EITHER)
only operate on the selected days
ENABLE STATE
DISABLE STATE
15
TIMESLOT 3
SETUP
AND
(BOTH)
when a time slot is ANDed with selected days, it will
DEVICE NO. = "X"
TIMESLOT 4
DEVICE NO. = "X"

ENABLE STATE
DISABLE STATE
13
when a time slot is ORed with selected days, it will be

enabled during selected times and will remain ON
throughout the days selected.
Time blocks
MON
TUE
WED
FRI
SAT
SUN
COMMAND BUILD NO. "Y"
NOTE: A Timeblock may contain any multiple Timeslots.

A Timeslot may be linked to any number of Timeblocks.
TRIGGER
TIMESLOT 16
The default is for all the devices to be in Time block 0.

A Timeblock is enabled if any one of the Timeslots within
it is in the enable state.
A Comand Build linled to a

Time Block will be triggered
when the Timeblock is enabled
and reversed when the
Time Block is disabled.
A time block is used to perform periodic enable disable action

on the system.
There are 0 - 15 time blocks per panel
the time block 0 is always in the enable state and is

the default for all sensors
a time block can be linked to one or more time slots

Time slots
A time slot must be linked with a time block. It is the time block that perform actions on the system.
"
when a time slot is enabled the time block it is linked

to is also enabled
Timeslots do not process when the panel is in a fire condition.
a time slot can be:

triggered automatically
switched ON / OFF manually
or switched ON / OFF by Command build
it performs an action immediately or after a delay of 0 to 24 hours.
There can be up to 16 time slots per panel
a sensor or interface input can only be assigned to one

time block
when a time block is in an enable state:

any sensor(s) linked to it will operate in the
enable state that has been set up
any command build linked to it is triggered

when a time block is in a disabled state any zone tasks
linked to it are also disabled.
139
Disable time
Zones
Groups
Test/Eng
OHS
LOOP1
INTERFACE
DEVICES
ASSIGNED TO
ZONE 4
Off
Flashing
Zones
1
17
2
18
3
19
4
20
5
21
6
22
7
23
8
24
9
25
10
26
11
27
12
28
13
29
14
30
15
30
16
32
all local controller events are in group 0, ie faults,
ZONE 1
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
ZONE 4
ZONE 5
ZONE 4
DEVICES
ASSIGNED TO
ZONE 4
warning, silence alarms and reset.
"
ZONE X
LOOP2
INTERFACE
DISABLE
ZONE Z
all devices default to Group 1
ZONAL MIMIC PANEL
MCP
OHS
There can be up to 128 groups
ZONE INDICATORS ON THE PANEL
On
All MCC / MCB / LCC (local controller) events are in

Group 0, ie FAULTS, WARNING, SILENCE ALARMS and
RESET etc.
NOTE: A DEVICE CAN ONLY

BE ASSIGNED TO ONE ZONE
MCP
ZONE E
ENABLE
A zone has a collection of trigger devices that are located in the same general area. It may be used for one or all
three of the following:
for illumination of zonal fire lamps on Main panel or Zonal mimic panel
for common disablement purposes
There can be up to 128 Zones per A3 or A2 zonal mimic panel / 64 Zones per A4 zonal mimic panel.
Zones are used to provide local indication of fire at the main panel and to send fire messages to zonal mimic and
loop repeat panels and repeat indicator panels off main panel.
integral zonal indicators can be configured to give steady / flashing indication of 1st zone in fire
Devices from any loop may be assigned to the same zone.

A device may only be assigned to one zone.
Input/output lines of an interface can not be assigned individually to zones. The interface lines can only be
assigned collectively to a zone.
140
ALL DEVICES THAT

GO INTO FIRE
WILL TAKE THIS
ROUTE
DISPLAY
FIRST
DEVICE LABEL
DEVICE IN ONE ZONE ONLY

DEVICES ASSIGNED
TO ZONE 'A'
messages, to provide:
Common zone label only (this is the default).
label of first device in fire
or all individual device labels.
DISPLAY ALL
INDIVIDUAL
DEVICE LABELS
DEFAULT
TO ALL REPEATS
ON LOCAL PANEL
a zone can provide 3-level sensing:

Prefires
Fires
Superfires
DISPLAY
COMMON ZONE
LABELS ONLY
TASK NUMBER 1
SMOKE DET.
LOOP 1
TOTAL OF 128
ZONES
PER PANEL
w SENSOR x PRE FIRE y FIRE z SUPER FIRE
MCP
TASK NUMBER 2
I/O
DEVICES ASSIGNED
TO ZONE'A'
ZONE
'A'
TASK NUMBER 3
TASK NUMBER 4
HEAT DET.
SMOKE DET.
TASK NUMBER 5
LOOP 2
MCP
TASK NUMBER 6
I/O
via TEST/ENG menu

TASK NUMBER 7
TIME
BLOCK
TASK NUMBER 8
OUTPUT TRIGGER
TO COMMAND BUILD 'X'
OUTPUT TRIGGER
OUTPUT TRIGGER
OUTPUT TRIGGER
OUTPUT TRIGGER
OUTPUT TRIGGER
OUTPUT TRIGGER
NOTE: EACH OUTPUT CAN TRIGGER ONE COMMAND BUILD
HEAT DET.
OUTPUT TRIGGER
There can be up to 128 Zones of which the first 64 are for standalone system and remaining zones for
sensors can be configured to provide coincidence operation

using a combination of all 3 levels if required
up to 8 permutations of fire detection (Zone tasks) may be

configured per zone
a zone task can be made to trigger a command build or a

range of command builds, (this is done in the zone set up
menu)
the same command build can be triggered by different tasks

within a zone
disabling a zone will disable the sensors within that Zone

disabling a zone via a time block disables the tasks performed
by the zone.
all devices default to zone 1
network use. The number of Zones for standalone system can be re-configured via the commissioning tool.
a zone is a collection of devices, sharing a common label

a device can only be assigned to one zone
141
a Zone task may be used to control the display of fire
Zone Tasks
or non-reversible action, (deactioned by another

DISPLAY ALL
INDIVIDUAL
DEVICE LABELS
ALL DEVICES THAT

GO INTO FIRE
WILL TAKE THIS
ROUTE
DISPLAY
FIRST
DEVICE LABEL
DEVICE IN ONE ZONE ONLY

DEVICES ASSIGNED
TO ZONE 'A'
DEFAULT
TO ALL REPEATS
ON LOCAL PANEL
DISPLAY
COMMON ZONE
LABELS ONLY
HEAT DET.
TASK NUMBER 1
SMOKE DET.
LOOP 1
TOTAL OF 128
ZONES
PER PANEL
MCP

TASK NUMBER 2
I/O
DEVICES ASSIGNED
TO ZONE'A'
ZONE
'A'
TASK NUMBER 3
TASK NUMBER 4
HEAT DET.
SMOKE DET.
TASK NUMBER 5
LOOP 2
MCP
TASK NUMBER 6
I/O
via TEST/ENG menu

TASK NUMBER 7
TIME
BLOCK
TASK NUMBER 8
"
OUTPUT TRIGGER
OUTPUT TRIGGER
OUTPUT TRIGGER
OUTPUT TRIGGER
OUTPUT TRIGGER
OUTPUT TRIGGER
OUTPUT TRIGGER
Where possible use sectored action instead of command build action.
There can be up to 255 command builds per panel.

a command build can only be set up with one trigger (can be a range)
a command build can be triggered:
for reversible action (automatic deaction on removal of trigger)
142
OUTPUT TRIGGER
NOTE: EACH OUTPUT CAN TRIGGER ONE COMMAND BUILD
Command Builds
command build for a non-fire trigger or reset for a fire

Trigger).
the command build trigger for zone tasks reside under the
zone menu.
command builds that are triggered through a sector fire event
will deaction on fire reset. This is independent of whether the
sector is configured to deaction on silence alarms.
command builds that are configured for turn Off actions have
no reverse action to turn On again, another command build or
manual action is required.
command builds can be used under fire and non fire
conditions to carry out pre-configured actions built up from
the Control menu.
a command build can only be set up to perform one action
(can be a range), any split range would require a second
command build.
each command build can be given a 40 character label to be
displayed and/or printed when triggered. If no label is given
then nothing will be displayed
if a label is given, the local buzzer will operate for 1 minute
when the command build is active.
command builds are logged with an On/Off time, this
information can be viewed by selecting [info] -> [Event]->
[Supervis]-> [Log] and if still On via [Info]-> [Event]->
[Supervis]-> [Active], this is only possible if a label has been
given to the Command Build
when speed of operation is required the lowest number
command builds should be used as these are processed first
if a digital output line is to be actioned by a command build,
the I/O line should not be assigned to a sector as it may
deaction when the silence alarms is pressed regardless of the
command build still being active
a fire condition takes priority over a command build
&
Take great care not to action a digital output to

an input line, as this will effectively disable the input.
Sounders Configuration
Number
FAB action
SAB action
The standard alarm devices of each standalone system can be configured for three
no output
Turns Off selected Outputs
10mS pulse on selected Outputs
frequency tone
On/Off control.(On being low

frequency)
high frequency tone
1.2S pulse on selected Outputs
sound output signals.
every 250mS over a 2 second time the sound output can be altered to high, low or off
tone.
sound signal configuration can be altered by modifying the FAB-SAB pairs by

pressing the button Menu On/Off to select [Set-Up] -> <etc-> -> [Modify]-> <etc>
-> [Signal n] -> [Sounder] -> [Enter] and enter the FAB/SAB for Signal n and press
enter.
FABs & SABs
The FAB (first action byte) determines tone and On/Off control while the SAB (second action byte)
determines the action to be performed on the output.
Time in seconds
Factory Default FABs
0
0.25
0.5 0.75 1.0
1.25 1.5
1.75
SABs
Signal 3 (Continuous)
Output turns on Low
frequency sound
continuous every 0.5
seconds.
4F
Signal 2 (Evacuate)
First output turns on
Low frequency sound
continuously, then every
half second the High
frequency output is
pulsed for 250mS.
4F
Signal 1 (Alert)
Pulses high frequency
for 250mS every half
second.
65
00
25
00
4F
4F
65
00
25
00
4F
4F
65
00
25
00
4F
4F
65
00
25
Turn on selected Outputs
00
143
S-Cubed Mark I
S-Cubed Mark II and S-Quad
An S-Cubed device can operate in Tone or Voice mode dependent on type.
Speech function
All S-Cubed in a system can share a common start volume setting from a range
between 16% to 100% sound output.
The Mark II S-Cubed or S-Quad Speech sounder function is provided by stored messages on a
flash memory chip within the assembly. The standard flash memory can hold up to 20 seconds of
audio and additionally it holds local complex attention tones, such as the bell and DIN signals.
All S-Cubed in a system can share a common soft start facility, if set the sound output Each signal output from a Mark II S-Cubed or S-Quad Speech device consists of an attention tone
will increment the volume every 0.25s from a defined start level to maximum output.
Setting made using the commissioning tool
S-Cubed operating in tone mode allows selection from a range of low and high
frequency tones that are outputted according to FAB/SAB settings, see sounders
configurations section.
S-Cubed set for Voice mode operation allows selection from a range of tones and
messages that span over 10 seconds duration. The tones and messages are those held
in respective S-Cubed device.
Voice
The Speech only S-Cubed
provides voice message
with tone output.
Standard Tone
Tone 1
Tone 2
Tone 15
Message 1
Message 2
Message 7
Standard Tone
Tone 1
Tone 2
Tone 15
Standard Tone
Tone 1
Tone 2
Tone 7
Strobe
The Strobe S-Cubed output is
defined by what signal is being
actioned on the S-Cubed.
Programmable period
normally set at 10 seconds
can be configured up to 60 seconds
Attention tone
Speech Message
Standard
or Complex
tone
Message n
Programmable
Pre-speech silence
Programmable
Post-speech silence
10 seconds period
Attention tone
Tone + Message
Tone only
Speech Message
Std tone or Tone n
It is possible to reprogram factory set speech messages
Message
Tone
The sequence repeated until Sounder is silenced
Sounder
The Sounder S-Cubed provides
sound output over a duration
as defined by the FAB/SAB
held at the control panel
followed by a message. The attention tone can be a local complex tone or a panel tone, such as
the standard 'nee naw' sound.
FAB/SAB is output, see Sounders

configuration held at the control panel
If actioned:
Signal 1 will provide strobe output at 0.5Hz
Signals 2 or Signal 3 will provide strobe output at 1Hz.
Strobe function
In the event of a fire the appropriate S-Cubed or S-Quad device in the system will output alarm
signals according to the site specific needs and these can be either signal 1, 2 or 3 alarm:
every 2 second with signal 1

However, the operation of the strobe with the signals 1, 2 and 3 can be changed at the
commissioning stage. The strobe is synchronised with S-Cubed and S-Quad strobes installed in the
same system.
"
The Disability Act 1995 recommends visual alarms, like S-Cubed and S-Quad,
are installed in protected premises to warn occupants who are hard of hearing.
144
Auxiliary Relays
Turbo high tone

Turbo low tone - high output
Turbo low tone
Turbo rich high tone
Turbo rich low tone
Turbo square wave
Modulated version of turbo waveform
A Mark II S-Cubed or S-Quad sounder can operate in turbo mode if configured during
The two auxiliary relays in the control panel are defaulted to operate on:
commissioning to provide further 3dB output. The sound outputs are based on the settings of the
FABs and SABs at the panel that gives changing levels over 2 seconds duration in 8 time slots. The
a sectored fire event the Auxiliary relay 1 and
standard outputs are synchronised with the 34000 sounders and other S-Cubed or S-Quad devices
a fault event the Auxiliary relay 2.
installed in the same system.
the auxiliary relays can be configured for normally-open or normally-closed
The volume of the sound output can be individually set at the device, note that the sound level
operation.
should not be set lower than 65dBA at 1m for standards compliance. The system prevents
the relays may be configured to be operated with:
adjustment of volume down to zero. Another feature that can be configured is the soft start that
ramps the sound volume gradually to the maximum level set at the device.
a Fault
a Warning
Turbo and Non Turbo Modes
any combination of Sectored Fire events
The S-Cubed or S-Quad sounders can output in turbo and/or in non turbo modes. The high and low
or any of the above combination
FAB mappings are used to change the tone output of the S-Cubed or S-Quad sounder. The turbo
mode outputs a waveform with a basic frequency that is the same as the resonant frequency of the It is possible to delay the operation of each relay by up to 10 minutes after the first
FIRE event. The accuracy of the delay is 0 - 4 seconds.
piezo inside each device. The non turbo mode outputs modulated turbo waveform.
The relay will operate immediately for fault and warning events.
Waveforms with basic frequency
same as resonant frequency of piezo
Sounder function
Non-Turbo square wave

Non-Turbo high tone (Default)
Non-Turbo low tone - high output
Non-Turbo low tone (Default)
Non-Turbo rich high tone
Non-Turbo rich low tone
145
These functions explained in this section apply to networked systems. See also guidelines for standalone system.For
information on Command build actions across a network, see Appendix C.
"
When commissioning a network of control panels, ensure the software version is the same across all the
panels. This is also applicable when an existing network is to be installed with additional panels.
There can be up to a maximum of 64 Master Sectors per

panel
a total of 255 master sectors per network system
they are therefore a collection of:
Sectors
Delayblocks
Master Alarms
and Aux Relays from one or more Systems.
they provide global alarm actions across a network of
control panels
Master Sectors
Guidelines
PANEL 1
NETWORK
PANEL 2
MASTER
SECTOR 2
MASTER
SECTOR 1
ASSIGN
SECTOR
ASSIGN
SECTOR
that has
just gone
into fire
255 PER
NETWORK
DELAY
BLOCK
SIGNAL
1
Fire input sectors must only be assigned to one Master

Sector.
Output Sectors can be assigned to more than one Master
ASSIGN
ASSIGN
O
O
F
MASTER
ALARM
ASSIGN
SECTOR
that has
just gone
into fire
64 PER
PANEL
ON
OF
SIGNAL
2
ASSIGN
AUX
RELAY
ON
OF
SIGNAL
3
SIGNAL
1
ASSIGN
O
O
F
F
Appendix D - Guidelines for Networked system commands
Appendix D - Guidelines for Networked system

commands
ON
COMMAND
ACTION
BUILD
OF
SIGNAL
2
ALL
SIGNALS
OFF
ON
OF
SIGNAL
3
ASSIGN
ALL
SIGNALS
OFF
TRIGGER
COMMAND
BUILD
SECTOR
COMMAND
BUILD
146
Sector.
Master Sectors can be actioned by a Sectored Fire Event.
a triggered Master Sector can action (one or any
combination of):
Sector
another Master Sector
Command Build (not locally)
Delay Blocks
Master Alarms
or Auxiliary Relays.
If a Sector assigned to a Master Sector has a Fire Event, the
Master Sector will not perform any local actions on the
Panel in alarm.
If a Command Build actions a Master Sector, the actions
will be performed on other panels, but Command Builds
will not be triggered.
A Master Sector must have something assigned to it before
any Master Sector action links can be made to it.
Master Sector Fire Event actions on other Panels can be
stopped by global Silence Alarms.
MASTER GROUP 1
LINK
MASTER GROUP 2
MCC / MCB
CARD 0
OUTPUT
MASTER GROUP 4
Groups within different Control Panels can be assigned to the same

Master Group
Global controls can be configured to output/input or both.

Messages and controls within a standalone system do not require any
MASTER GROUP 3
RESET
Once message passing has been setup for global repeat or mimic
indication, the local panel will also have to route reset messages to other
groups, besides group 0.
INPUT
setting up
RESET
the Group 0 contains all panel events and fire resets and therefore must
always be assigned to a Master Group.
MASTER GROUP 5
MASTER GROUP 6
SILENCE
ALARMS
BOTH
MASTER GROUP 7
BOTH SILENCE
ALARMS
"
The Verify control button that is applicable for EN panels only

can operate globally, like the Sound alarms, Silence alarms and Reset
buttons.
MASTER GROUP 8
There can be up to a maximum of 8 Master Groups per network.

These are a collection of Groups used for:
selective fire and non fire event message routing within a Control Panel or around a Network
of Panels
and for routing Global Controls Silence Alarms, Sound Alarms and/or Reset to designated
Control Panels on a Network.
Messages can be displayed or printed on Control Panels or Repeat Panels. Messages are routed on
a Card by Card basis, ie:
Card 0 = Panel LCD
Card 15 on Vigilon (Card 0 on Vigilon Compact) = Panel Printer
Cards 1-6 = Repeats and Mimics (Loops 1-6)
Each Card can be configured to display/print All Events (default) or just Fire Events. Repeat
Panels on the same loop will always give the same information.
147
"
Master Groups
148
Appendix E - Cards
Appendix E - Cards
This section contains copies of instruction leaflets supplied with each card.
Appendix E - Cards
Data and Installation
Main Control Card

(VIG-MCC-24)
This leaflet covers the Main Control(ler) Card
(VIG-MCC-24) which is designed for installation in
VIG1-24 and VIG1-72 Vigilon panels.
P2 socket to accept a
20-way ribbon
cable from the DKC
USB port
to accept
commissioning
tool connection
MCC card fits into the Backplane

slot marked P1 (MCC/LCC)
40-way ribbon
cable from the DKC
Reset
Switch
SW1
Chip
2211-143
V4.xx
Minimum
should be
V4.37
BATT1
Lithium battery + side up
Remove insulation sleeve or
disk before installing the card
Operating
temperature
Lithium Battery
Weight
Overall size
-10C to 55C
0C to 45C
CR2032 3V cell.
Replace the battery only with
the same or equivalent type.
Dispose of all used batteries
according to the
manufacturers instructions.
96g (approximate)
157mm height x 100mm width
Technical data
Storage
temperature
Relative humidity up to 90%
(non condensing)
Battery connection
The MCC has a battery insulation sleeve or disk
that must be removed before the card is fitted in the
backplane.
&
Once the battery insulation sleeve or

disk is removed from the MCC, the card MUST
NOT be placed on a metal surface as this may
result in damage to the components on the card.
4188-906_issue 2_02/09_new MCC
Backplane
by Honeywell
The MCC card must be installed in the correct

location in the backplane.
"
An IO Card is not required for the connection
of DKC and Commissioning tool. The DKC ribbon
cables now connects to P2 and P4 on the MCC and the
Commissioning tool connect to the USB port on MCC.
When handling the card always use

anti-static work procedures.
&
&
Backplane

cables (at the fold) under the clamp
Always ensure the panel is completely

powered down before removal or fitting of cards
into the backplane. Power down the battery supply
before the mains supply. The power up should be
done in a reverse order.
40 way ribbon
20 way ribbon
Card guides
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
CARD 4
CARD 3
CARD 2
CARD 1
CARD15
CARD 0
Network or RS232 or
Loop Card#

(Option)

(Option)

(Option)
Loop Processor Card (SUPPLIED)

or RS232
Main Controller Card or

Local Controller Card (SUPPLIED)
Use the USB port on

the MCC to connect to
the Commissioning tool.
P6
CARD 5
Network or RS232 or
Loop Card#

P7
CARD 6
# for VIG1-72 only
P8
Backplane
Installation
At the end of their useful life, the packaging,

product and batteries should be disposed of
via a suitable recycling centre and in
accordance with national or local legislation.
WEEE Directive:
product and batteries should be
disposed of via a suitable recycling centre.
Do not dispose of with your normal household waste.
Do not burn.
by Honeywell
Telephone: +44 (0) 116 246 2000
Hamilton Industrial Park, Waterside Road, Leicester LE5 1TN, UK
MCC
4188-906_issue 2_02/09_new MCC
Fax (UK): +44 (0)116 246 2300
Website: www.gent.co.uk
Gent by Honeywell reserves the right to revise this publication from time to time and make changes to the content hereof without
obligation to notify any person of such revisions of changes.
Main Control Cards
20-way ribbon cable
from the DKC
MCC build PRE February 2007
Chip
2211-xxx
40 way ribbon
cable
20 way ribbon
cable
Main Control card
SW1
BATT1
by Honeywell
USB port to accept

commissioning
tool connection
MCC build POST February 2007
Chip
2211-xxx
Overall size in mm
96g (approximate)
157 height x 100 width
0C to 45C
up to 90%

Weight
CR2032 3V cell.
Relative humidity
(non condensing)
Storage temperature -10C to 55C
Operating
temperature
Replace the battery only with the same or

equivalent type. Dispose of all used batteries
according to the manufacturers instructions
Lithium Battery
Technical data
Once the battery insulation disk or

sleeve is removed from the MCC, the card MUST
NOT be placed on a metal surface as this may
result in damage to the components on the card.
&
The battery insulation disk or sleeve must be

removed before the MCC is fitted in the backplane.
Battery connection
Lithium battery Remove insulation sleeve or

+ side up
MCC card fits into the

Backplane slot marked P1 (MCC/LCC)
40-way ribbon cable
from the DKC
Reset
Switch
(for EN version 4.xx panels & nodes)

This leaflet covers a range of
Main Control(ler) Card (MCC)
options for EN version 4.xx
control panels and Network
nodes. Each MCC is supplied
with a number of chips having
part numbers 2211-xxx, see
chart overleaf. The appropriate
chip must be fitted to the card
before card installation. Card
options:
VIG-MCC-UPGR
VIG-MCC-EN-NOD-UPG.
Chip 2211-xxx
Fit the correct chip 2211-xxx in
the MCC for the type of panel or
node, see chart overleaf.
&
Only fit the MCC build POST February
2007 into Vig1-24 / 72 panel / node. Also note the
20-way ribbon cable in a Vig1-24/72 panel / node
connect directly to the MCC.
Backplane
P1
The MCC card must be fitted in the correct location

in the backplane.
To DKC
P4
LCC - P1
Loop Processor card
Input/Output card
LOOP 1 - P3
Space for 3 Loop

Processors
LOOP 3 - P5
LOOP 4 - P6
P7
P8
RAM Card#
LOOP 2 - P4
IOC- P2
Vigilon Control panel and

Network node backplane
# A RAM Card is only fitted in Vigilon panel
having 16 line display and where the
backplane has no flash.
4188-861.02_02/07_MCC EN
Past Products
8 line display
Vigilon EN + Zn LEDs
Post Feb 05
Vigilon EN
Network Node
Control Panel
Zones 1
17
Panel healthy
Fault
12:00
Fault
Fault
Vigilon Fire System

GENT 1998
15:45
7
23
8
24
9
25
10
26
11
27
12
28
13
29
14
30
15
30
Control Panel
Network Node
16
32
Zones 1
17
Fault
Fault
Fire
Delay
2
18
Verify
System Fault
Sounder
System fault
CB253
7
23
8
24
9
25
10
26
11 12 13
2712:00
28 29
14
30
15
30
Fire
16
32
Panel healthy
Fire
15:45
Vigilon Fire System

GENT 2005
Test
Panel
19 20healthy
21 22
Vigilon Fire System

GENT 1998
Panel healthy
Previous
Disablement
Next
System Fault
Disablement
Previous
Previous
12:00
Fault
Fire
Vigilon Fire System
GENT 1998
Commission
System Fault
Power
Disablement
Fire
Vigilon Fire System
GENT 1998
Commission
Power
Disablement
Power
Panel healthy
12:00
Fault
15:45 Commission
Sounder
Vigilon Fire System

GENT Limited 2003
Disablement
CB254
Sounder
Power
Power
Next
Next
Previous
CB254
Next
Previous
Next
Next
Power
Fire
Panel Healthy
Fault
15:45
Verify
Vigilon Fire System

GENT 2005
Delay
Test
Previous
6
22
Vigilon EN
Next
Zones 1
17
Disablement
5
21
Vigilon EN
Control Panel
CB253
Power
Previous
Previous
Power Fault
System Fault
4
20
Main Control
Card
Vigilon EN + Zn LEDs
Pre Feb 05
Verify
Commission
Vigilon Fire System

GENT 2005
Delay
Disablement
Test
Disablement
3
19
Panel Healthy
System Fault
Fire
System Fault
2
18
Power Fault
Fire
Panel Healthy
System
Fault
Power
Fault
16 line display
Current products
Fault
Next
2
18
3
19
4
20
5
21
6
22
7
23
8
24
9
25
10
26
11
27
12
28
13
29
14
30
15
30
Fire
Panel Healthy
16
32
Zones 1
17
System Fault
CB253
Delay
CB254
Test
Power
Disablement
3
19
4
20
5
21
6
22
7
23
8
24
9
25
10
26
11
27
12
28
13
29
14
30
15
30
Fire
Verify
System Fault
Sounder
2
18
Fault
16
32
Panel healthy
Vigilon Fire System

GENT 2005
Panel healthy
12:00
Sounder
Sounder
System Fault
Vigilon Fire System

GENT 1998
CB253
Vigilon Fire System

GENT 1998
Previous
Next
WEEE Directive:
With Zone LED
Vig EN-Zn
Post Feb 05
2211-143
Fault
Sounder
System Fault
Power
Disablement
12:00
Fire
Vigilon Fire System
GENT 1998
Part number
2211-xxx
Sounder
Power
Previous
Next
Power
Disablement
Next
Power
Previous
Next
With Zone LED
Vig EN-Zn
Pre Feb 05
2211-147
Vig EN
2211-155
VIG-MCC-UPGR
Vig EN
2211-176
VIG-MCC-EN-NOD-UPG
Fax (UK): +44 (0)116 246 2300
Main Control Cards (MCC)
Vig EN
2211-152
Fire
CB254
Disablement
Without Zone LED
Panel healthy
12:00
Fault
15:45
Power Fault
Previous

Do not burn.
Telephone: +44 (0) 116 246 2000

by Honeywell
4188-861.02_02/07_MCC EN
Main Control Card (EN) - Compatibility Information
Main Control Cards

by Honeywell
Weight
Overall size in mm
CR2032 3V cell.
96g (approximate)
157 height x 100 width
20-way ribbon cable
from the DKC
3300
SW1
BATT1
AC
0C to 45C

IO CARD
(Slot or
Card 15)
P4
P7
MAIN
CONTROL
CARD
(Slot or Card 0)
IO switch
enable
dongle
Dongle
P6
SPARE
SLOT
P5
P7
MAIN
CONTROL
CARD
USB port to accept

commissioning
tool connection
MCC build POST February 2007
up to 90%
NETWORK
CARD
(Slot or Card 13)
AC
Loop (3300)
P6
IO
SPARE
SLOT CARD
P5
3505 Terminal node backplane
P4
NETWORK
Card
(Not used
for 3300)
32K and Senator 2 Network Interface

backplane
Lithium battery Remove insulation sleeve or

+ side up
MAIN CONTROL
CARD
LOOP PROCESSOR
CARD Loop 2 optional
(Slot or Card 2)
IOC
LOOP PROCESSOR CARDS
3404
AC
AC
E
LOOP PROCESSOR CARD

loop 1
(Slot or Card 1)
RAM (Memory) CARD

(Slot or Card 3)
INPUT OUTPUT CARD

(Slot or Card 15)
MAIN CONTROL CARD

(Slot or Card 0)
NC
Chip
2211-xxx
40-way ribbon cable
from the DKC
Reset
Switch
Relative humidity
(non condensing)
Storage temperature -10C to 55C
Operating
temperature
Only replace the battery with the same or

equivalent type. Dispose of all used batteries
according to the manufacturers instructions.
Lithium Battery
Technical data
The MCC card must be fitted in the correct location

in the appropriate backplane, see illustrations.
Backplane
(for BS - version 3+ panels & nodes)

This leaflet covers a range of Main Control(ler)
Card (MCC) options for BS version 3/3+ control
panels and terminal nodes. An MCC is supplied
with a number of chips having part numbers
2211-xxx, see chart overleaf. The appropriate chip
must be fitted to the card before card installation.
MCC options:
VIG-MCC-BS-NOD-UPG, 34K-MCC-UPGR,
VIG-MCC-V3+, VIG-MCC-3400 and
VIG-MCC-3500-NODE.
&
RAM
3300 Mk2, 32K and Senator 2

Control panel backplane
40 WAY
RIBBON
CABLE
20 WAY
RIBBON
CABLE
MCC card fits into the

Backplane slot marked P1 (MCC/LCC)
Chip
2211-xxx
MCC build PRE February 2007
Only fit the MCC build POST February

2007 into a Vig1-24 / 72 panel / node that is
converted from EN to BS panel / node. Also note
the 20-way ribbon cable in a Vig1-24/72 panel /
node connect directly to the MCC.
Chip 2211-xxx
Fit the correct chip 2211-xxx in the
MCC for the type of panel or node,
see chart overleaf.
Battery connection
The battery insulation disk or sleeve
must be removed before the MCC is
fitted in the backplane.
&
40 way ribbon
cable
Once the battery

insulation disk or sleeve is
removed from the MCC, the card
MUST NOT be placed on a metal
surface as this may result in
damage to the components on the
card.
P4
P1
Main Control card
To DKC
Input/Output card
20 way ribbon
cable
IOC- P2
Loop Processor card
LCC - P1
LOOP 1 - P3
Space for 3 Loop

Processors
IOC
MAIN CONTROL
CARD
Vigilon and 34K Control panel and

Network node backplane
LOOP PROCESSOR CARDS
HALT
NORMAL
3404 & 3300 Mk1 Control panel backplane
RAM Card (only fitted

in 16 line display panel)
Network card
LOOP 2 - P4
LOOP 3 - P5
P7
LOOP 4 - P6
P8
RAM NC
3408 Control panel backplane
4188-860.02_02/07_MCC BS
Current products
Past Products
8 line display
14 3408
1 Vigilon BS
3 Vigilon BS
2 34K BS
Panel healthy
Network Node
Panel healthy
12:00
Fault
Fault
Previous
Previous
Next
Vigilon Fire System

GENT 1998
Test
Power
Disablement
8 34K BS
11 3300 Mk 2
Control Panel
Verify
Commission
Network Node
CB254
Previous
Previous
Next
Next
Power
Next
Panel healthy
12:00
Fault
Panel healthy
Fire
Telephone: +44 (0) 116 246 2000
System Fault
Vigilon Fire System

GENT 1998
Disablement
12 32K
17 3505
Control panel
Terminal Node
3408 FIRE ALARM CONTROL
Fire
Vigilon Fire System
GENT 1998
System Fault
16 3300 Mk 1
Main Control
Card
Network Interface
12:00
Fault
Commission
15 3404
13 Senator 2
Control Panel
CB253
Power
Disablement
CB254
6 34K BS
15:45
Vigilon Fire System

GENT 2005
System Fault
CB253
Power
Disablement
Commission
Warning
System
Fault
Power
Fault
Verify
Commission
10 Senator 2
Fire
Panel Healthy
15:45
Vigilon Fire System

GENT 2005
7 Vigilon BS
Fire
Fault
Fire
Vigilon Fire System

GENT 1998
Control panel
5 Vigilon BS
12:00
Fault
Fire
Panel Healthy
System Fault
9 32K or
4 34K BS
Control Panel
System
Fault
Power
Fault
16 line display
Commission
Power
Disablement
Previous
Power
Next
Previous
Next
by Honeywell
GENT
Fault
Fire
Panel Healthy
System Fault
Fault
15:45
Verify
Power Fault
Fire
Panel Healthy
System Fault
CB253
CB254
Previous
Next
15:45
Vigilon Fire System

GENT 2005
Test
Power
CB253
Fault
Panel healthy
12:00
Fire
Panel healthy
Fault
12:00
Fire
CB254
Disablement
Previous
Next
Power
System Fault
Without Zone,
Delay and Sounder LEDs
Part number
2211-xxx
Verify
Power Fault
Vigilon Fire System

GENT 2005
Commission
Warning
Without Zone,
Delay and Sounder LEDs
Vigilon/34000 Fire System

GENT 1998
Warning
Commission
Power
Previous
System Fault
Vigilon/34000 Fire System

GENT 1998
Warning
Power
Previous
Next
Commission
Next
Vig BS
2211-153
Vig BS
2211-168
34K BS
2211-171
34K BS
2211-170
VIG-MCC-BS-NOD-UPG
34K BS
2211-151
34K BS
2211-169
34K-MCC-UPGR
Vig BS
2211-144
Vig BS
2211-150
VIG-MCC-V3+
# A RAM Card is only fitted in Vigilon panel

having 16 line display and where the
backplane has no flash.
11
3300 Mark 2
To be advised
32K/Senator 2 10
14
12
10
32K/Senator 2
2211-165
and 11 are future options.
13
3408
2211-164
15
3404 / 3300 Mk 1 16
2211-164
VIG-MCC-3400
17
3505
2211-165
VIG-MCC-3500-NODE
Main Control Cards (MCC)

WEEE Directive:

Do not burn.
Fax (UK): +44 (0)116 246 2300
4188-860.02_02/07_MCC BS
Main Control Card (BS version 3/3+) - Compatibility Information
Installation instructions
Copper Network Card (EN)
VIG-NODE.
Technical data
Overall size
Node address range
Baud
Operating voltage
Terminations
Cable
Weight
Operating
temperature
Storage temperature
Cable screen
No
connection
by Honeywell
5V (RS485)
Terminal block P10 assuming
Network card is installed in
backplane slot P8
Belden 9729 (example)
72g (approximate)
0C to 45C
-10C to 55C
up to 90%
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
0V -ve +ve 0V I -ve +ve I
P10
To Next
panel
or node
Using the Copper Network card a maximum of up to 31 Control

panels and Network nodes can be connected in a secure
network loop, with up to 1.2Km cable distance between
panels/nodes dependent on cable type.
Relative humidity
(non condenscing)

1 to 31
2400, 9600, 19.2K and 38.4K
This network card can be installed in:

Vigilon Fire Panels
VIG1
VIG1-NET
VIG2
VIG2-NET
VIG3
VIG3-NET
VIG4
VIG4-NET
Vigilon Network Node
(VIG-NC) for EN54 Vigilon Network
This copper network card is used to allow data to pass

between control panels and network nodes installed in a
networked fire system. The card must be plugged into the
backplane of the panel or node in a dedicated slot. When it is
plugged into the slot P8 on the backplane the external cables
must be connected to terminal block P10, which is also on the
backplane.
The dual-in-line switches on the card are set to program the
address number and baud rate.
"
The 0V connection
is as shown.
P10
Where a copper network card is plugged into

a control panel or network node, ensure the panel/node
Local Controller software is at Version 4.00 or later.
No
connection
Connecting the Panels and Nodes
From
previous
panel
or node
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
BACKPLANE
Connections for
Network card in
Socket P8 (Card 6)
BACKPLANE
Control Panel
Network Node
Connections for
Network card in
Socket P8 (Card 6)
Control Panel
or Network Node
Copper Network Card (EN54) 4188-832 issue 2_12/05
6
5
4
1
On
8
7
Switch settings
Off
3
2
SW1
backplane
IOC / NC
LOOP 4
LOOP 3
LOOP 2
LOOP 1
IOC / NC
P8 CARD 6
P7 CARD 5
P6 CARD 4
P5 CARD 3
P4 CARD 2
P3 CARD 1
P2 CARD 15
MCC / LCC P1 CARD 0
NC
LCC - Local Controller Card

MCC - Main Control Card
IOC - Input Output Card
NC - Network Card
LOOP n - Loop Processor Card
P1
To DKC
P4
Backplane
64
off
on
off
on
on
off
off
on
off
off
off
off
on
off
off
off
off
off
on
off
off
off
off
off
on
off
off
off
off
off
on
off
on
off
on
on
off
off
38.4K
19.2K
9600
2400
Copper Network Card (EN)
Network Card
20 way
ribbon
cable
40 way
ribbon
cable
Copper Network Card
"
2
on
off
on

Do not burn.
WEEE Directive:
Baud rate switch

numbers and settings
3
off
on
Node address switch numbers and settings
on
Baud
63
Address
- factory settings
by Honeywell
Telephone +44 (0) 116 246 2000
Fax (UK): +44 (0)116 246 2300
Copper Network Card (EN54) 4188-832 issue 2_05/09
oblication to notify any person of such revisions of changes.
Copper Network Card (BS)

by Honeywell
Storage temperature
Operating
temperature
Weight
Cable
Terminations
Operating voltage
Baud
Node address range
Overall size
up to 90%
-10C to 55C
0C to 45C
72g (approximate)
Terminal block P10 assuming

Network card is installed in
backplane slot P8
5V (RS485)
2400, 9600, 19.2K and 38.4K
1 to 31
Cable screen
No
connection
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
P10
To Next
panel
or node

panels and Network (Terminal) nodes can be connected in a
secure network loop, with up to 1.2Km cable distance between
panels/nodes dependent on cable type.
Relative humidity
(non condenscing)
Specification
VIG-NODE-V3+ or 34K-NODE-V3+
This network card can be installed in:

Vigilon or 34K Fire Panels
or 34K1-V3+
VIG1-V3+
VIG1-NET-V3+
VIG2-V3+
VIG2-NET-V3+
VIG3-V3+
VIG3-NET-V3+
VIG4-V3+
VIG4-NET -V3+
Vigilon or 34K Network (or Terminal) Node
(VIG/34K-NC-V3+) for BS5839 Vigilon or 34K Network
P10
This copper network card is used to allow messages of status

and control data to pass between control panels and network
(or terminal) nodes in a networked fire system. The card must
be plugged into the backplane of each panel and node in a
dedicated slot. When it is plugged into the slot P8 on the
backplane the external cables must be connected to terminal
block P10, which is also located on the backplane.
The dual-in-line switches on the card are set to program the
The 0V connection
is as shown.
Connecting the Panels and Nodes
From
previous
panel
or node
No
connection
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
BACKPLANE
Connections for
Network card in
Socket P8 (Card 6)
BACKPLANE
Control Panel
Network Node
Connections for
Network card in
Socket P8 (Card 6)
Control Panel
or Network Node
Copper Network Card (BS) 4188-789 issue 2_12/05
6
5
4
1
On
8
7
Switch settings
Off
3
2
SW1
backplane
IOC / NC
LOOP 4
LOOP 3
LOOP 2
LOOP 1
IOC / NC
P8 CARD 6
P7 CARD 5
P6 CARD 4
P5 CARD 3
P4 CARD 2
P3 CARD 1
P2 CARD 15
MCC / LCC P1 CARD 0
NC
LCC - Local Controller Card

MCC - Main Control Card
IOC - Input Output Card
NC - Network Card
LOOP n - Loop Processor Card
P1
To DKC
P4
Backplane
64
off
on
off
on
on
off
off
on
off
off
off
off
on
off
off
off
off
off
on
off
off
off
off
off
on
off
off
off
off
off
on
off
on
off
on
on
off
off
38.4K
19.2K
9600
2400
Copper Network Card (BS)
40 way
ribbon
cable
Network Card
20 way
ribbon
cable
Copper Network Card
"
2
on
off
on

Do not burn.
WEEE Directive:
Baud rate switch

numbers and settings
3
off
on
Node address switch numbers and settings
on
Baud
63
Address
- factory settings
by Honeywell
Telephone +44 (0) 116 246 2000
Fax (UK): +44 (0)116 246 2300
Copper Network Card (BS) 4188-789 issue 2_05/09
Gent by Honeywellreserves the right to revise this publication from time to time and make changes to the content hereof without
Installation
Fibre Network Card (EN+BS)
MCC V4.00
or later
Network Card
VIG-NC-FO
MCC V3.90
or later
MCC V4.16
or later
Network Card
VIG-NC-DOM-FO
2211-139
VIG-NC-FO
factory fitted to
the network card
2211-141
VIG-NC-DOM-FO
0C to 45C
-10C to 55C
up to 90%
by Honeywell
factory fitted to
the network card
2211-142
DOMAIN
2211-140
optional chip
supplied for the
network card
NODE
optional chip
supplied for the
network card
Specification
Overall size
Node address
range
Baud
Terminations /
Fibre Optics
Weight
Operating
temperature
Storage
temperature
Relative humidity
(non condenscing)

1 to 64 (VIG-NC-DOM-FO)
1 to 32 (VIG-NC-FO)
19.2K, 38.4K, 115.2K & 230.4K
ST connection is by means of the
ST sockets on the Network card.
Cable: Multi mode 62.5 / 125m
Fibre 820nm wavelength
82g (approximate)
VIG-NC-FO Fibre Optic Network card

Using the Fibre Optic Network card VIG-NC-FO up to 31
Control panels and Network Nodes can be connected in a
secure loop. There can be up to 2Km Fibre Optic cable
distance between panel and node.
VIG-NC-DOM-FO Fibre Optic Network card
(for Domain bridge)
Using the Fibre Optic Network card VIG-NC-DOM-FO up to
64 smaller networks can be connected to form a secure
domain. The Fibre Optic cable distance between nodes of the
smaller networks can be up to 2Km. The entire system can
have up to 200 panels/nodes.
Ensure antistatic precautions are taken

when replacing chip on the card. It is
recommended that a suitable chip extractor is
used when extracting chip from the card, such as
the one from RS part number 480-3005.
&
BS Vigilon
panel
EN Vigilon
panel
Fibre Network Card Chip options
(VIG-NC-FO and VIG-NC-DOM-FO) for Vigilon Network
Notch
The fibre network card allows fast message passing to the
network. The card must be plugged into the backplane of the
panel or node in a dedicated slot. The fibre optic cables
connect directly to sockets on the card. There are two builds of
the fibre network cards for secure EN54 and BS Vigilon
networks.
MCC compatibility
EN Vigilon
panel
MCC V3.90
or later
Before installing this Fibre Network Card in either EN or BS

Vigilon Control panel, ensure the panel's Main Control Card
(MCC) has compatible software.
BS Vigilon
panel
4188-790 issue 4_01-10_fibre Network Card (EN & BS)
Installation
Tx
End 1
P7
Rx
P2
P4
Tx
on
End 2
Rx
Switches for
Baud rate
7
Tx
off 38.4K
on 230.4K
new Fibre Network Card (EN)
Off
20 way ribbon
cable
40 way ribbon
cable
Backplane slot and switch location

On
SW1
To DKC P1
P4
Local Controller card

Input/Output card
Loop Processor card
Space for 3 Loop
Processors
Network card

Do not burn.
WEEE Directive:

The fibre optic network cards are factory set

for 38.4K baud with node address 4.
"
Backplane
P8
P7
LOOP 4 - P6
LOOP 3 - P5
LOOP 2 - P4
LOOP 1 - P3
IOC- P2
MCC/
LCC - P1
Fibre Optic Network Card
BAUD
on
off off off
on
ADDRESS
P3
P5
Tx
BACKPLANE
P6
Rx
Connecting Panels and Nodes

Rx
"
SW1 Switch settings
Switches for
Node Address
1
on
off off off off off on
1
off on
on
off off off off on
off off off off off on 115.2K
2
on
on
3
off off on
on
C 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
C8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
by Honeywell
Telephone +44 (0) 116 246 2000
Fax (UK): +44 (0)116 246 2300
4188-790.03_fibre Network Card (EN & BS)
Registered office: Novar House: 24 Queens Road, Weybridge, Surrey KT13 9UX
- Factory settings
63 on
64 off off off off off off off off 19.2K
Ensure the patch leads are of the correct

length. The leads connect directly to the Fibre Network
Card and patch panel.
Links P2 and P3 are booster links.

Normally the links are not fitted, however for
distance exceeding 750m the links must be fitted.
P2 settings are for End 1
P3 settings are for End 2
Control Panel or Network Node
C8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
new IO Card (EN54)

(VIG-IOC-DOM)
Baud
(When installed as an
additional IO card)
Node address range
Overall size
10m cable distance

1.2Km cable distance
1200, 1800, 2400, 3600,

4800, 7200, 9600 and 19200
1 to 31
148mm height x 100mm

width
by Honeywell
RS232 (Port 0)
RS485 (Port 1)
72g (approximate)
Specification
Weight
Storage temperature
up to 90%
-10C to 55C
Operating temperature 0C to 45C

Relative humidity
(non condenscing)
"
There is no need to switch between the

RS232 and RS485 ports as they are both available for
simultaneous use.
IO card installation and associated

terminals
Terminal card
RS232 (Port 0)
-ve 5V +ve 0V Tx CTS RxRTS
RS485 (Port 1)
The diagram below shows the associated terminals for

standard IO card when it is installed in the backplane of
panel/node.
This new Input Output (IO) card (part no. VIG-IOC-DOM) is

designed for installation in EN54 Vigilon analogue addressable
fire panels and Network node:
Vigilon Fire Panels
VIG1
VIG1-NET
VIG2
VIG2-NET
VIG3
VIG3-NET
VIG4
VIG4-NET
Vigilon Network (Terminal) Node
VIG-NODE.
When installing an additional IO card it is important

to set its DIP switches SW1 to the required baud rate
and node address and the rotary switch SW2 to the
required function before installing the card in a spare
socket of the backplane.
Set the rotary switch SW2 to a required function.

Ensure all DIP switches SW1 are set to the Off
position before installing the IO card in socket P2 of
the backplane
Connect the 20 way ribbon cable from DKC
connector P4 to the IO card socket P2.
One additional IO card can be fitted into the
backplane spare socket P7 of the control panel and
up to four into the backplane sockets of the Network
node.
Checks
new IO card replaces existing IO cards

The new IO card combines the functions of and will replace the
existing IO cards:
VIG-IOC-PRT
VIG-IOC-ASCOM
VIG-IOC-UFD
VIG-IOC-UNI
The existing IO cards are no longer available.
new IO Card (EN54) 4188-777 issue 3_11/05
IO card location
P4
To DKC P1
Local Controller card
20 way ribbon
cable
40 way ribbon
cable
One new IO card is normally fitted as Card 15 in socket P2 of

the Control panel backplane.
LCC - P1
Input/Output card
Loop Processor card
IOC- P2
LOOP 1 - P3
7
6
4
2
1
Network card
Space for 3 Loop

Processors
LOOP 3 - P5
P7
LOOP 4 - P6
P8
8
5
3
P2
Factory
set to 5
IC4
SW2
LOOP 2 - P4
Backplane
SW1
Setting switches SW1 and SW2

On
Off
new IO Card
1 2 3
P3
"
IMPORTANT:
The Vigilon Control Panel make use of the DIP switches
on the DKC, located on the inner door. The switches are
used to set address and baud rate. It is important that the
DIP switches SW1 on the IO card are ALL set in the UP or
OFF position so that they are ignored.
by Honeywell
Telephone +44 (0) 116 246 2000
new IO Card EN54 (VIG-IOC-DOM)
SW1 Switch settings

The switch positions shown here are applicable for the new IO
Card when installed as an additional IO card.
"
Off Off Off Off Off

1
Node Address
Off Off Off Off On

2
Off Off Off 1200 baud

Off Off Off On Off
5|
No dongle is required for DIP switches to

work when used as second or additional IO card.
Baud Rate
Off Off On 1800 baud

3
Off On Off 2400 baud

Off Off Off On On
4
Off On On 3600 baud

Off Off On Off Off
5
On Off Off 4800 baud

Off Off On Off On
6
On Off On 7200 baud

Off Off On On Off
On On Off 9600 baud

7
Universal Half-Duplex (as

VIG-IOC-UNI)
Domain Bridge Full-Duplex
Ascom Pager (as

VIG-IOC-ASCOM)
Universal Full-Duplex (as

VIG-IOC-UFD)
Remote Printer (as

VIG-IOC-PRT)
Slave I/O
3217 Half/Full-Duplex
Switch
position from
8 to F sets
this port for
other
applications
at 9600 baud.
Switch
position from
0 to 7 sets this
port for
Repeat panel
at 1200 baud.
Port 1
(RS485 mode
On On On On On up
to
31
On On On 19200 baud Off Off On On On
Factory settings
SW2 Switch settings
Rotary Standard connections

Switch Port 0 (RS232) Mode
Pos.

Do not burn.
WEEE Directive:
Factory setting
Hamilton Industrial Park, Waterside Road, Leicester LE5 1TN, UK.
new IO Card (EN54) 4188-777 issue 3_11/05
Fax (UK): +44 (0)116 246 2300
new IO Cards V3+ (BS)
Operating temperature
Weight
RS232 (Port 0)
RS485 (Port 1)
Baud
(When installed as an
additional IO card)
Node address range
Overall size
-10C to 55C
0C to 45C
72g (approximate)
10m cable distance

1.2Km cable distance
1200, 1800, 2400, 3600,

4800, 7200, 9600 and 19200
1 to 31
148mm height x 100mm

width
by Honeywell
Storage temperature
up to 90%
RS485 (Port 1)
RS232 (Port 0)
-ve 5V +ve 0V Tx CTS RxRTS
34K-IOC-PRT-V3+
Backplane
plug in
location
Associated
terminals on
terminal card
RS232/RS485
The diagram below shows the associated terminal for standard

IO card when it is installed in the backplane of panel/node.
IO installation and associated terminals
There is no need to switch between the

RS232 and RS485 ports as they are both available for
simultaneous use.
"
Relative humidity
(non condensing)
Specification
(VIG-IOC-V3+ / 34K-IOC-V3+)
The new Input Output (IO) cards part numbers VIG-IOC-V3+

and 34K-IOC-V3+ have version 3+ software. They are
designed for installation in fire panels to BS5839:Part 4, such
as the Vigilon, 34000, 32000, 3400 and 3300 analogue
addressable fire panels and Network (or Terminal) nodes.
new IO cards replaces existing IO cards
VIG-IOC-PRT-V3+
34K-IOC-UFD-V3+
Control Panel or
Network Node
Terminal card
VIG-IOC-ASCOM-V3+
34K-IOC-UNI-V3+
P4
The new IO card combine the functions of all the existing IO

cards and will replace the existing IO cards:
VIG-IOC-UFD-V3+
P2
P15
Vigilon Control panel
P2
P2
34K-IOC-SLV-V3+
IOC
VIG-IOC-UNI-V3+
Network node for

Vigilon and 34000
P8-P9
P4
32000 Control panel
P6
TB9/TB10
P2
Network node for

32000
SK2
TB6
34000 Control panel
3404 Control panel
SK2
P6
32023-21
13332-13
3408 Control panel
P5
13432-03V3
The existing IO cards listed above are no longer available.
3405 Network node

for 3408/3404
new IO Cards V3+ (BS) 4188-797 issue 2_7/05
Checks
Set the rotary switch SW2 to a required function.

Ensure all DIP switches of SW1 are set to the Off
position before installing the IO card in the backplane
of Vigilon or 34000 system Control panel or Network
node.
A 20 way ribbon cable connects between DKC
connector P4 and the IO card socket P2.
One additional IO card can be fitted into the spare
socket on the backplane of the Vigilon/34000/3400
control panels and up to four into the backplane
sockets of the associated Network node.
8
7
6
5
3
2
P2
IC4
Factory
set to 0
SW2
When installing an additional IO card it is important to

set its DIP switches SW1 to the required baud rate and
node address and the rotary switch SW2 to the
required function before installing the card in a spare
socket of the backplane.
On
SW1
Setting switches SW1 and SW2
Off
new IO Card
Vigilon,
34000, 1 2 3
3400
3300 Mark 1
P3
P3
32000 & 1 2 3
3300 Mark 2
"
IMPORTANT:
The Vigilon and 34000 Control Panels make use of the DIP
switches on the DKC, located on the inner door. The
switches are used to set address and baud rate. For these
panels it is important that the DIP switches SW1 on the IO
card are ALL set in the UP or OFF position so that they
are ignored.
Telephone +44 (0) 116 246 2000
new IO Cards - version 3+ (BS)
SW1 Switch settings

The switch positions shown here are applicable for the new IO
Card when installed as an additional IO card in the Vigilon or
34000 panel or node.
"
1
Off
Off
On
On
Off
Off
On
On
2
Off
On
Off
On
Off
On
Off
On
Baud Rate
|
1200 baud
1800 baud
2400 baud
3600 baud
4800 baud
7200 baud
9600 baud
19200 baud
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
4
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
5|
On On
Switch
position from
8 to F sets
this port for
other
applications at
9600 baud.
Port 1
(RS485
mode)
Switch
position from
0 to 7 sets this
port for
Repeat panel
at 1200 baud.
Off Off Off

Off Off On 1
Off On Off 2
Off On On 3
On Off Off 4
On Off On 5
On On Off 6
On On On 7
|
On On On up
to
31
Node Address
7 8
|
No dongle is required for the DIP switches to

work, when used as a second or additional IO card.
Off
Off
Off
Off
On
On
On
On
SW2 Switch settings

Rotary Standard connections
switch Port 0 (RS232) Mode
Pos.
0 or 8 3217 Half Duplex
1 or 9 Slave I/O
2 or A Remote Printer (as
VIG-IOC-PRT-V3+)
3 or B Universal Full-Duplex (as
VIG-IOC-UFD-V3+)
4 or C Ascom Pager (as
VIG-IOC-ASCOM-V3+)
5 or D Domain Bridge Full-Duplex
6 or E Universal Half-Duplex (as
VIG-IOC-UNI-V3+)
7 or F Factory settings
WEEE Directive:
Do not burn.
Fax (UK): +44 (0)116 246 2300
new IO Cards V3+ (BS) 4188-797 issue 2_7/05
Copper Network Card
1 - Wire link
1 - Spade tag
Technical data
Dimensions in mm
Node address range
Baud
Operating voltage
Terminal block
Cable
Weight
Operating
temperature
Storage temperature
PB1B
0V L1- L1+
by Honeywell
5V (RS485)
2.5mm2
108g (approximate)
0C to 45C
-10C to 55C
up to 90%
Standoff
CARD 1
Loop Card (Loop 1)
new
Wire link to Network card
The Network card must be plugged into

CARD 2 slot.
&

panels can be connected in a secure network loop, with up to
1.2Km cable distance between panels dependent on cable
type.
Relative humidity
(non condensing)
155 height x 100 width x

25 depth
1 to 31
2400, 9600, 19.2K and 38.4K
The Network card (Part number:

COMPACT-NC) is compatible with Vigilon Compact
panel having a new MCB (Part number: VCS-MCB-N)
with software version 4.36 or later and new PSU
(Part number: VCS-PSU-N).
"
(COMPACT-NC) for Vigilon Compact (Networkable)
2 - Stand offs
0V L2- L2+
PB1A
Network Card
Terminals for network

connections
PB2
This copper network card is used to allow data to pass

between control panels in a Vigilon Compact networked fire
system. The card must be plugged into the Master Control
board MCB of the panel in a dedicated slot 'CARD 2'. The card
has terminals to accept external network wiring.
A bank of dual-in-line switches on the card allow setting of
Card installation
If a second loop card is to be
installed, then first fit the network
card into slot marked 'CARD 2'
on the MCB using the standoffs
supplied and then fit the second
loop card into the network card.
Fit the wire link supplied between
the network card and MCB as
illustrated.
"
Set the baud

rate and address before
installing the Network card,
for details see overleaf.
CARD 2
Loop Card (Loop 2)
4188-888.02_1/07_Copper Network Card (for Vig Comp)
N/C
Copper Network Card (for Vig-Compact)
0V L2- L2+
0V L1- L1+
Cable screen
0V L1- L1+
PB1B
N/C
0V L2- L2+
PB1A

Card 2
PB1B

Card 2
0V L2- L2+
0V L1- L1+
N/C
Control Panel
Control Panel
0V L1- L1+
PB1B
N/C
0V L2- L2+
PB1A

Card 2
PB1B

Card 2
Control Panel
On

Do not burn.
WEEE Directive:
12345
678
Off
Component side
DIL switches location on the Network card
Control Panel
PB1A
Cable screen
PB1A
Wiring a network of Vigilon Compact panels

N/C = No connection
Where a multicore cable is being

used ensure the unused cores
(cores without signal) are
connected to 0V.
The cable screen must
be connected to an earth
terminal in the backbox,
as shown.
Dual in line (DIL) switches
"
Baud rate
The copper network card is factory set for

38.4K baud with node address 4.
Node address
2
2400
3
off
9600
64 off off off off off off off

off
19.2K
on off off off off off on

on
38.4K
1
off on off off off off off
on
2
on on off off off off on
3
off off on off off off

Baud
63 on on on on on on
Address
- factory settings
by Honeywell
Telephone +44 (0) 116 246 2000
Fax (UK): +44 (0)116 246 2300
4188-888.02_1/07_Copper Network Card (for Vig Comp)
Appendix F - Spare parts
Appendix F - Spare parts
The appendix has information on spare parts for the Vigilon panels.
Installation
EN to BS conversion kits
by Honeywell
b.
a.
Isolate the mains supply to the panel/node.
Backplane
40 way ribbon
40 way ribbon
P4
P3
P2
P1
CARD 3
CARD 2
CARD 1
CARD15
CARD 0
Main Controller Card

(MCC)
20 way ribbon
Card guides
20 way ribbon
P5
CARD 4
Network or RS232 or
Loop Processor Card#

P6
CARD 5
Network or RS232 or
Loop Processor Card#
Loop Processor Card (LPC)
P7
CARD 6
# for VIG1-72 only

Note: The loop processor cards are not
applicable for Network node.
P8
Backplane

cables under the clamp
For safety remove the mains fuse from

the mains terminal block inside the panel/node.
&
Open the outer and inner doors of the

panel/node and disconnect the battery supply
to the panel/node.
Replace cards
The mains supply to the panel / node

must be completely isolated before commencing
conversion work.
&
Installation
for Vig1-24/72 panels & node

These conversion kits are designed for installation
in Vig1/24/72 Control panels and Network node.
The kit (VIG-BSKIT) can be installed in VIG1-24 or
VIG1-72 control panel to convert it from an
EN control panel to BS control panel.
The kit (VIG-BSKIT-NODE) can be installed in a
VIG-NODE-24 to convert it from an EN Network
node to a BS Network node.
1 x Network Card (NC)

(BS - version 3)
(Not supplied with VIG-BSKIT)
1 x Input / Output Card (IOC)

(BS - version 3)
(Not supplied with VIG-BSKIT)
1 x Blank label
1 x Commission / Warning LED label
1 x Loop Processor Card (LPC)

(BS - version 3)
(Not supplied with VIG-BSKIT-NODE)
1 x Main Control Card (MCC)

(BS - version 3)
The kit consists of:
Commission
Warning
"
The Loop Processor Card is supplied with

the conversion kit VIG-BSKIT but not with the kit
VIG-BSKIT-NODE, as the Network node does not
support Loop circuits.
4188-913.01_04/07_EN to BS kits
Installation
Remove backing, align

and stick the label to
membrane.
Control and indication membrane
Fault
Power Fault
F4
6
7
&
.,
Enter
Delete
Insert
U4
U3
U2
U1

membrane.
EN to BS conversion kits
Verify
Fire
Sounder
Space
Verify
Cancel Buzzer
Power
CB253
System Fault
Next
F3
Delay
Previous
F2
CB254
F1
Test
Disablement
Menu On/Off
4
U
Reset
Silence Alarms
3
T
L
Sound Alarms
"
R
K
2
E
J
1
W
H
:
;
Q
G
Fire
Remove the backing off the Blank label and

stick the label over the Sounder LED. This is
done to hide this indication as it is not applicable
for BS compliant system.
b.
a.
Close the inner and outer doors of the panel /

node.
Conduct tests to ensure the panel / node is

operating correctly.
Power up the panel / node by connecting the

battery supply and switch on the mains power to
the panel / node.

Do not burn.
WEEE Directive:

c.
Power up
b.
F
N
D
B
S
V
A
C
Disconnect the 20-way and 40-way ribbon

cables from the MCC.
c.
Unplug the MCC and if applicable the LPC, IOC

and NC card(s) from the backplane.
d.
Shift
e.
If the control panel is fitted with more than one

loop card then additional cards may be acquired using
part number VIG-LPC-V3+.
"
Before fitting the replacement MCC remove the

battery insulation sleeve / disk. Fit the
replacement cards supplied in the kit into the
backplane and ensure they are seated correctly.
f.
Re-connect the 20-way and 40-way ribbon

cables to the replacement MCC and ensure the
cables are secured in the camp on the
backplane.
Fit label set

a.
Remove the backing off the

Commission/Warning label and stick the
label on the control and indication membrane in
the location shown over the
Disablement/Test/Delay LEDs. This is done to
ensure the panel LEDs are correctly labelled for
BS compliant system.
by Honeywell
Telephone: +44 (0) 116 246 2000
4188-913.01_04/07_EN to BS kits
Fax (UK): +44 (0)116 246 2300
Installation
Upgrade Kit
(VIG72-UPGR) for VIG1-24 panel
This upgrade kit (VIG72-UPGR) is designed for installation in a
Vigilon panel (VIG1-24). It is used to convert a VIG1-24 panel to
VIG1-72 panel. The kit consists of a 72Hr PSU module for
charging up to 8 x 21Ah batteries installed in a remote battery
box. It consists of parts j to n.
P7
LD1 LD2 LD3 LD4 LD5
P11
FS2
3A15 QB
P5
P1
ON
4 3 2 1
SW1
P1
DANGER
P2
Removal of
cover exposes
live parts
WARNING
P2
TH+ TH-
FS8
3A15 AS
B1+ B1- B2+ B2-
FS3
P1
by Honeywell
x 1 72Hr PSU Module

x 1 Battery filter cable
(with 1- fixing screw)
x 1 Battery Terminal Card
x 2 - 12V 21Ah Battery

x 1 Battery box
P1
TH+TH-
P1 P2
P4 P3
TH+ BT1+ BT2+

THBT1- BT2-
TH1
P6
x 1 Instructions
TH+TH-
P3
P11
P3
B1B2B1+
B2+
P2
P7
"
The upgrade will achieve standby duration to be extended

from 24 hours to up to 72 hours plus 0.5hr alarm load. This is made
possible with appropriate number of batteries in the battery box for
the required system load.
P3
P2
B1B2B1+
B2+
FS1

is switched on.
Battery Box
Control Panel
Additional batteries - 4 x 12V 21Ah are available on part number

VIG-72-BATT. The battery loop load calculator must be used to
determine the battery capacity required for the system to meet the
standby duration.
Control Panel
Batteries 4 x 12V 21Ah

or 8 x 12V 21Ah
Battery Box
4188-880.01_01/07_72hr upgrade
TH+ THB1+ B1- B2+ B2-
Installation
To Upgrade the PSU
&
The mains supply to the panel must be
completely isolated before commencing PSU
upgrade work.
a)
Open the outer and inner doors of the panel.
Isolate the mains supply to the panel.
How to remove the existing PSU and

batteries
b)
&
f)
e)
d)
c)
Unplug the Battery cable from socket P20 on

PSU.
Disconnect Ribbon cables from connector P7

and P11 on PSU, then unplug the 0V (black)
lead from spade connector P5 on PSU.
Disconnect the two batteries and remove them

from the panel, keep them in a safe place until
required.
Disconnect the mains Live and Neutral wires at

the PSU terminal block P2.
Vigilon PSU upgrade kit for VIG1-24
Reconnect the Live and Neutral wires to PSU

module terminal block P2.
Connect the other end of Battery filter cable k

to connector P1 on PSU.
Fit the PSU module j into the back box and

secure it using the original fixing screws.
With the terminal block towards the front, fit the

Battery terminal card l onto the base of the
back box and secure it using a screw supplied.
Connect one end of the Battery filter cable k

to connectors P3 on the Battery terminal cardl.
How to fit the PSU Upgrade Kit

a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
Reconnect the Ribbon cables from the

backplane to socket P11 on PSUand terminal
card to P7 on PSU. Plug in the 0V (black) lead to
spade connector P5 on PSU module.
Install the Battery box n underneath the panel
or if installed in a remote location then no more
than 10m/15m cable distance away from the
panel, when using 1.5mm /2.5mm fire cable,
such as MICC.
&
j)
i)
h)
Close the inner and outer doors of the panel

and the outer door on the battery box.
Carry tests of disconnection and reconnection of

battery circuit(s) and mains supply to check fault
monitoring.
Ensure that the charger ADC- battery ADC is
<5bits (e.g. BC1-BT1< 5).
Also the battery float voltage should be about:
27.5V @ 15 Deg C
27.3V @ 20 Deg C
27.1V @ 25 Deg C
Insert the mains fuse in to the mains terminal

block, connect and switch ON the mains power
to the panel.
Follow the instructions supplied in the battery

box to make the connection between the panel
and battery box. The instructions show how to
correctly install the batteries inside the box.
Ensure adequate fixtures and fittings are

used for the type of construction surface onto which
a battery box is to be mounted to support a weight
of up to 56Kg.
k)
g)
For safety remove the mains fuse from the

mains terminal block inside the panel.
f)
g)
Remove the PSU module fixing screws and

remove the PSU from the back box. Keep the
fixing screws for later use.

WEEE Directive:
Do not burn.
by Honeywell
Telephone: +44 (0) 116 246 2000
4188-880.01_01/07_72hr upgrade
Fax (UK): +44 (0)116 246 2300
Installation
Battery installation
B
Lower
shelf
P1 P2
P4 P3
TH+ BT1+ BT2+

THBT1- BT2-
P1 P2
P4 P3
TH+ BT1+ BT2+

THBT1- BT2-
by Honeywell
P6
TH1
P6
TH1

Do not burn.
WEEE Directive:
Battery Box
Upper
shelf
Lower
shelf
Upper
shelf
Battery Box
inside Battery box for VIG1-72 panel

These instructions cover how to install 12V 21Ah
batteries inside the battery box of VIG1-72 panel.
Black
It is recommended that the mains supply is switched

off during battery installation.
Red
Ensure the batteries are held in place while they

are being wired. Ensure the battery terminals
do not come into contact with the metal enclosure.
Place the two batteries in the lower shelf and lay them
horizontally with terminals facing outwards.
Fit the bolt, spade connector, washer and spring
washer to each battery terminal as shown above.
White.
Red
Black
Fit the white link lead and then fit the red/black
fused lead to the battery terminals.
Red
Raise the two batteries to an upright position

and push them back into the enclosure.
Black
White.
Route the battery red/black lead through hole in shelf

and connect to the respective connectors on PCB,
located on the top right side of the enclosure.
Add two more batteries 'B' to the lower shelf and repeat
procedures j to n.
Where required, add four batteries to the upper shelf,
follow procedures j to o. The only exception
is that the red/black lead is directly connected to the
respective upper connectors on the PCB.
is switched on.

by Honeywell
Telephone +44 (0) 116 246 2000
Fax (UK): +44 (0)116 246 2300
4188-876.01_issue 2_09/06_72hr-batt. inst.
Gent by Honeywell reserves the right to revise this publication from time to time and make changes to the content hereof
without obligation to notify any person of such revisions of changes.
Installation
Replacement PSU for Vigilon
SW1
FS8
3A15 AS
1 2 3 4
ON
P7
LD1 LD2 LD3 LD4 LD5
TH+ TH-
P1
DANGER
P2
WARNING
P11
Removal of
cover exposes
live parts
by Honeywell
LPC
MCC
V3.74 / V4.06 or higher
c)
b)
a)
Open the outer door of the battery box and

disconnect battery power to the panel / node.
Isolate the mains supply to the panel / node.
P5
TE
PCB
PCE
NE L
PSU Chassis
TE - Transformer Earth
PCE - PSU Chassis Earth
Mains
Filter
N
PCB
TE
NE L
PCE
Mains
Filter
PSU Chassis
NE L
PSU Chassis
PCE
PCB
TE
Mains
Filter
Various PSU mains and filter wiring of installed

Vigilon panels
For safety, remove the mains fuse from

the mains terminal block inside the panel/node.
&
Open the outer and inner doors of the panel /

node and remove the Metal cover if fitted over
the Terminal card. Discard the metal cover.
How to remove the existing PSU from

a panel / node
IO
The Replacement PSU for Vigilon can only be

installed in a 34000 or Vigilon panel/node having
short cards with minimum software version as
stated below:
Short card
Software version number
Compatibility
Backward Compatible (VS-PSU-RPL)

This replacement power supply unit (VS-PSU-RPL)
can be used to replace a faulty power supply unit in
a Vigilon or 34000 fire alarm control panel or
network (terminal) node.
&
FS2
3A15 QB
B1+ B1- B2+ B2-
FS3
x 1 Battery
Connection
Board
x 1 Instructions
The mains supply to the panel, node and

external charger units (where applicable) must be
completely isolated before commencing PSU
replacement work.
P1 P2
P4 P3
TH+ BT1+ BT2+

THBT1- BT2-
PSU
P6
TH1
Spares pack 1
Battery cable assembly
Battery Link assembly with

spade connectors
x4
x2
x 1 Terminal block
x 1 Terminal Card to PSU

cable assembly
x 4 10A Fuse QB ceramic 20 x 5mm

Spares pack 2
White
White
Blue
Brown
Black
Red
x 1 Terminal Card to PSU

- Ribbon Cable
x 1 Backplane to Terminal Card
- Ribbon Cable
x 4 Stand offs
x 1 Thermistor lead
x 2 22K 0.5W Resistor
x 1 3A15 Fuse AS glass 20 x 5mm
x 1 3A15 Fuse QB ceramic 20 x 5mm
4188-881_issue 3_02/10_Replacement PSU Back Comp.
Spare
Parts
FS1
h)
Unplug the 0V (black) lead bullet connection at

the PSU.
Disconnect ribbon cable from connector at P10

on the Terminal card.
PSU backward compatible for Vigilon
i)
P2
P7
LD1 LD2 LD3 LD4 LD5
P11
Removal of
cover exposes
live parts
WARNING
Unplug the battery and thermistor cables from

sockets P3 and P5 on PSU.
DANGER
j)
TH+ TH-
FS8
3A15 AS
Unscrew the three captive screws. Hold the PSU

lifting it up and then out from the panel / node.
FS2
3A15 QB
B1+ B1- B2+ B2-
P5
Old PSU
Replacement PSU
SW1
k)
P3
P1
l)
Terminal card
0V lead
P2
FS3
Remove the Terminal card to Backplane ribbon

cable assembly and replace it with the one
supplied q.
Mounting studs
for PSU
Terminal cover, if fitted remove and discard
Ribbon cable:
Terminal card
to PSU
PSU secured by
Ribbon cable:
Backplane to PSU 3-off captive screws
P4
TH+ BT1+ BT2+

TH- BT1- BT2-
P1
1 2 3 4
Ribbon cable:
Terminal board
to Backplane
0V lead
Bullet connection
P6
Old incompatible
Battery (Thermistor)
card
Battery (Thermistor)
card
TH1
ON
d)
Unplug the mains Live and Neutral (and Earth

where applicable) wires u from the PSU.
Installation
e)
Battrerybox
Backplane
Panel /node
Disconnect ribbon cable from connector at P12

on the Backplane and unclamp the cable.
Remove and discard the mains filter w, by first

removing the nut and bracket that secures the
filter.
Disconnect the mains Live, Neutral and all Earth

wires v from the mains terminal block.
f)
g)
FS1
Settings for EN and BS panel
FS8
3A15 AS
1 2 3 4
ON
P11
TH+ TH-
P1
DANGER
P2
Removal of
cover exposes
live parts
WARNING
Installation
SW1
Switch fitted on retrofit PSU only

PSU for BS5839 Panel
1 2 3 4
1
1
PSU for EN Panel (factory setting)
FS2
3A15 QB
B1+ B1- B2+ B2-
FS3
Configure the dual-in-line switch located on the top

edge of the PSU for BS or EN panel.
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Switches 2, 3 and 4 are not used.
External wiring
LD1 LD2 LD3 LD4 LD5

P5
TH+TH-
P7
B2+B2-
a)
Carefully disconnect and discard all internal

battery circuit wiring inside the existing battery
box.
Wiring the battery box
A maximum cable distance of 10m / 15m is

allowed between the control panel and battery box when
using 1.5mm / 2.5mm MICC cable.
"
The wiring between the panel/node and battery box

must be done correctly, observe terminal markings.
Fit the terminal block n to the thermistor card for
mounting into the battery box to allow connection of
external wiring.
ON
Terminal card
P11
P3
P1
B1+B1-
P2
A filter board located on

the PSU Chassis must be
wired as shown.
For bottom cable entry of battery cables into

the panel / node goto step b).
For top cable entry of battery cables into the
panel / node remove existing cable from
connector P11 and fit the cable assembly o
supplied into connector P11 on the Terminal
card.
Panel / node
Connect the PSU to Backplane ribbon cable q

to connector P12 on the Backplane.
Connect the PSU to Terminal card ribbon cable
p to connector P10 on the Terminal card.
Fit the bullet connector of the 0V (black) printer

lead.
If batteries are stored in enclosures having 05216

charger then ensure the charger is safely
decommissioned.
Where a decommissioned 05216 charger was
fault monitored by the Vigilon system via a 34415
Interface unit, then the interface unit must also be
decommissioned.
Secure the replacement PSU by tightening the

b) Replace the thermistor PCB located on the right
three captive screws.
side of the battery enclosure with the one
supplied in the spares packk.
For bottom entry of battery cables into the panel
/ node connect the external cables directly to P1
c) Wire the battery circuits using cables supplied,
and P2 on Filter board located on PSU chassis.
l and m, but do not make final connection
Where battery cable enter the panel / node from
until power up.
the top, then connect cable o to terminals P1
and P2 on filter board. Then make the external
Non standard battery box
connections to the Terminal card.
Where an existing non standard battery enclosure is
to be re-used for battery storage, then disconnect all
Connect the Live and Neutral to the mains
terminal block. Also connect the Earth wire from the internal battery circuit wiring. Install the thermistor
the PSU to spade terminal underneath the mains PCBk in a suitable location inside the enclosure
terminal block.
using 4-stand-offsr to allow wiring to reach all the
batteries using cables l and m supplied in the
spares pack.
Align and hook the replacement PSUj

supplied onto the top two fixing pins in the
backbox. If the battery cable assembly o is
fitted ensure it runs behind the PSU chassis
plate.
Ensure the filter board

board is wired correctly.
White
White
FS1
How to fit the replacement PSU into the

panel / node
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
Brown
Blue
h)
Red
Black
TH+TH-
P2
Panel / node
B2+B2-
Top cable entry
Battery 2 B2-
B2+
Bottom cable entry
Panel / node
Terminal card
P12
TH+
TH-
Thermistor
Installation
Filter card
P3
P1
B1+B1-
Leaded thermistor
B1+
Filter card
P3
P1
B1+B1-
by Honeywell
P2
TH+TH-
Thermistor
Telephone: +44 (0) 116 246 2000
P1 P2
P4 P3
TH+ BT1+ BT2+

THBT1- BT2-
P6
TH1

is switched on.
Battery Box
Up to 8 - 12V 21Ah batteries
Upper
shelf
B
Lower
shelf
Power up
c)
b)
Close the inner and outer doors of the panel /

node and also the outer door on the battery box.
Carry out battery and PSU tests, such as

disconnection and reconnection of battery
circuit(s) and mains supply to check for fault
monitoring.
Ensure that the charger ADC- battery ADC is
<5bits (e.g. BC1-BT1< 5).
Also the battery float voltage should be about:
27.5V @ 15 Deg C
27.3V @ 20 Deg C
27.1V @ 25 Deg C
Connect the mains supply, fit the mains fuse in

to the mains terminal block and switch ON the
mains power to the panel / node.
After all the installation and wiring is complete:

a) Connect the battery supply to the panel / node.
Note the panel will power up after mains supply
is switched ON.
d)
WEEE Directive:
Do not burn.
Fax (UK): +44 (0)116 246 2300

B2+B2-
Remove the terminal block from the leaded

thermistor assembly s and then connect the wire
ends to the terminals TH+ and TH- on the filter
board.
The battery connection board k must be

used where possible as described in this leaflet and
to meet the current standards. Where this is not
practical the leaded thermistor s may be fitted as
described here.
&
Battery 1 B1-
Control unit
Compartment
PSU
Compartment
Battery
Compartment
A - fixing points
B - fixing screws
Mains Filter
3408 FIRE ALARM CONTROL
PSU Compartment
0V
lead
Existing earth lead

(Remove and discard)
20-way
ribbon
P5
by Honeywell
P6
DANGER
LD1 LD2 LD3 LD4 LD5

P11
Removal of
cover exposes
live parts
WARNING
P2
Existing 3408 PSU
321
321
FS8
3A15 AS
TH+ TH-
P1
B1+ B1- B2+ B2-
Thermistor
lead
P1
B1+ B2+
B1- B2-
FS1FS3
SW1
Locating holes
Locating pins
P7
0V lead
FS2
3A15 QB
4 3 2 1
Disconnect the two ribbon cables

from the existing 3408 PSU
connectors P5 and P6.
26-way
ribbon
LEN
FS3
for Batt2
Replacement
PSU for 3408
FS1
for Batt1
ON
Installation
e.
Disconnect the printer 0V lead from

the existing 3408 PSU.
3408 Control panel
Replacement PSU for 3408

(VS-PSU-3408)
The Replacement PSU for 3408
(VS-PSU-3408) is designed for installation
in the 3408 Control panel.
&
The mains supply to the panel
must be completely isolated before
commencing PSU replacement work.
&
Note the battery leads are

routed through a hole from the PSU
compartment and into the battery
compartment .
Open the PSU compartment outer

door and disconnect the battery
connector from socket on the PSU
PCB.
First power down mains supply to the

3408 control panel at the fused spur
unit.
To remove the existing 3408 PSU

a.
b.
c.
Disconnect the Live Neutral and Earth

wires from the mains filter .
f.
d.
g.
Unscrew the five screws that secure

the existing 3408 PSU and remove
the assembly from the PSU
compartment.
Disconnect the filter earth lead

and discard it as it is no longer
required.
h.
Open the door of the Control unit

compartment and disconnect the
ribbon cables from the connectors:
CONN3 on termination card and
from connector PG1 on the
backplane. Discard the two ribbon
cables.
4188-919.01_09/07_Replacement PSU for 3408
L
E
N
P5
PG4
SW1
Batt2
Thermistor
lead
CONN3
Termination
Card
Replacement PSU for 3408
3408 Control panel

Control Unit Compartment
Backplane
P7
P5
P1
Replacement
PSU
P11
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
ON
SW1 on 3408 PSU

Switches 1, 2 and 3
are not used.
Printer
0V lead
Existing earth
lead (Remove
and discard)
Mains Filter
Batt1
PSU Compartment
+
+
-

Do not burn.
WEEE Directive:

Battery Compartment
ON
Installation
PSU setting for BS5839 Panel

(Normal setting for 3408 panel)
PSU for EN Panel
Connect the Live, Neutral and Earth wires

from the replacement PSU to the mains filter
Check the terminal markings on the filter

to ensure the Live, Neutral and Earth wires are
connected correctly.
&
Position the replacement PSU into the PSU

compartment such that the pins 'A' in the PSU
compartment align with the holes on PSU
chassis. Secure the assembly using the four
fixing screws 'B'.
Ensure the switch SW1 on the replacement

PSU for 3408 (replacement PSU) is
configured for BS5839 panel.
To fit the replacement PSU for 3408

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Connect the printer 0V lead from the Control

Unit compartment to the replacement PSU.
Route the thermistor lead into the battery

compartment and leave it floating to monitor
the temperature inside the compartment.
f.
"
The battery supply WILL NOT power up the

control panel until the mains supply is connected.
Connect the battery supply to the panel and
then connect the mains supply.
Route the two ribbon cables through the hole

on the top side of the PSU compartment and into
the control unit compartment. Connect the
20-way ribbon cable to termination card socket
CONN3 and the 26-way connector to
backplane socket PG4.
g.
A flashing indication
is given when the
PSU is communicating
with the MCC / LCC
LD5
replacement
PSU for 3408
LD1 LD2 LD3 LD4 LD5
P5
by Honeywell
Telephone: +44 (0) 116 246 2000
4188-919.01_09/07_Replacement PSU for 3408
Fax (UK): +44 (0)116 246 2300
Installation
Replacement inner door kit
2
18
3
19
4
20
5
21
6
22
7
23
Previous
F2
9
25
10
26
12
28
&
11
27
14
30
15
30
16
32
Fire
Verify
CB253
Sounder
Power
CB254
Cancel Buzzer
Space
Enter
Delete
Insert
U4
U3
U2
U1
Verify
15:45
F4
8
24
Next
F3
F1
13
29
by Honeywell

membrane.
Requires the replacement inner door to be modified with

labels j and k, before it is fitted to the backbox. Also a Main
Control Card part number VIG-MCC-BS-NOD-UPG, not
supplied, fitted into the backplane inside the node backbox.
BS Terminal Node (Network Node)
Requires the replacement inner door as supplied, without any

modifications fitted onto the backbox. Also a Main Control
Card part number VIG-MCC-EN-NOD-UPG, not supplied,
fitted into the backplane inside the node backbox.
EN Terminal Node (Network Node)
Requires the replacement inner door to be modified with

labels j and k, before it is fitted to the backbox. Also the
socketed chip on the Main Control Card supplied must be
replaced with the chip 2211-144 l in the kit, before the card
is fitted into the backplane located inside the panel backbox.
BS Vigilon panel
Requires the replacement inner door as supplied, without any

modifications fitted to the backbox. Also the Main Control
Card as supplied, without any modification, fitted into the
backplane located inside the panel backbox.
EN Vigilon panel
When fitting the replacement door to a panel having an

old style door, ensure the two metal Dzus Panex receptacle are
removed from the backbox.
"
(VS-IDOOR) for Older Vigilon Panels and Nodes

The replacement inner door kit
(VS-IDOOR) is a spare part for the older
Vigilon panels and Network nodes
having the inner door hinge pins located
on the backbox.
1 x Chip 2211-144
1 x Blank label
1 x Commission / Warning
LED label
Warning
Commission
Stick on labels to convert

the EN door to a BS door
The VS-IDOOR kit consists of:
1 x EN Replacement
inner door
1 x Main Control Card
"
Menu On/Off
Reset
Silence Alarms
Sound Alarms
Disablement
Test
Delay
System Fault
Power Fault
Fault
Zones 1
17
The Zone indicators are hidden until lit but are

NOT applicable for BS panels and Terminal (Network) Nodes.
Refer to the instructions supplied

with the Main Control Card for procedures
on how to fit the card into the backplane of
the panel / node.

membrane.
"
.,
:
;
Q
L
Fire
K
M
J
N
H
B
G
V
F
C
D
X
S
Z
A
Shift
4188-967_issue 3_08/09_Replacement door kit
Installation
When handling the card and chip always

use anti-static work procedures.
&
&
Always ensure the panel is completely
powered down before removal or fitting of inner
door and card in the panel/node. First power down
the battery supply before the mains supply. The
power up should be done in a reverse order.
To remove the Dzus Panex receptacle
Replacement inner door kit

How to fit labels to convert to a BS Door
Remove the backing off the Blank label and

stick the label to cover the Sounder text and
LED, as shown.
Remove the backing off the

Commission/Warning label and stick the
label to cover the Disablement/Test/Delay text
and LEDs, as shown.
The labels j and k supplied in the kit must be fitted

to the replacement door to ensure the panel/node
LEDs on the inner door are correctly labelled for a BS
Vigilon panel/node.
a.
b.
a.
b.

Do not burn.
WEEE Directive:

Fit the replacement chip l 2211-144 into the

Main Control Card.
Node the orientation of the chip before removal.

Remove the socketed chip on the Main Control
Card located on the mid left hand side, when
looking at the component side of the card with
the connector at the bottom.
The replacement chip l 2211-144 must be fitted to

the Main Controller Card before it is installed into the
backplane of a BS Vigilon panel only.
The old style panel door have two Dzus Panex clip-in
receptacles fitted to the backbox, these must be
How to replace the chip on MCC
removed as they are not required by the replacement
door.
Using a suitable screwdriver turn the retaining
washer one quarter turn anticlockwise and push out
the fastener from the backbox.
Dzus Panex receptacle
Retaining
washer
by Honeywell
Telephone: +44 (0) 116 246 2000
4188-967_issue 3_08/09_Replacement door kit
Fax (UK): +44 (0)116 246 2300
To assemble the Parallel bracket
Beam sensor (Legacy)
Steps to .
Fixing nuts
Fixed Plate
Angle bracket
with base
Parallel bracket
with base
IP66 bracket with base
Spring
washer
Junction
box
Base
Adjustable Plate
Fixed
Plate
Adjustable
Plate
Adjustable
Plate
Fixing nuts
Beam Rx
Beam Tx
Ensure nut is securely

fitted to the plate
To commission the beam sensor pair check the following:

The beam transmitter and receiver heads are installed on the same loop circuit.
Ideally two people in communication with each other will help the setting up of the
beam sensor pair. While one person aligns the beam sensor head, another person
operates the controls and reads measurements given at the control panel.
The following procedures use the terms head, device and outstation interchangeably.
It is assumed that each beam sensor head is mounted on an angle bracket. Also the procedures for
the IP rated beam and for beam sensor pairs mounted on parallel brackets are similar.
Identification
The beam sensor heads have a black plastic circular label surrounding the lens for
identification.
The 2-way base has a black plastic cover fitted over the electronics.
"
Before aligning the sensor heads check to ensure all bracket and base fixing
screws are securely fitted. After alignment ensure the pivot pins and adjusters are
secure.
Ensure plate is flush

against the washer
Beam Sensor pair
Initial alignment
a.
Gasket
cover plate
Using the adjuster on the bracket, roughly align one head to face the other
head. To do this:
slacken the locknuts to unscrew the Y- adjusters
Bracket fixing screws
Pivot for
X adjuster
Pivot for
Y adjuster
Beam sensor
head
to make a large adjustment remove the centre pin of the Y pivot

align the head in the Y-axis to face the opposite head
Movement
secure the centre pin into the appropriate Y-pivot to enable adjustment
Galvanised
Steel Junction
box
turn the adjusters to meet the centre pin and lock the axis adjusted using the lock
nuts.
repeat procedure for the X-adjusters and then repeat the whole procedure for the
Angle
bracket
opposite head.
Selecting gain
b.
Centre pin for

Y adjustment
Select a gain from the table for the required path. Set the gain of the receiver
head, to do this press Menu On/Off button and select [Test/Eng] -> [Loop]
Lock nut for
Adjuster for
the Y adjuster
Y direction
-> <etc> -> [Gain] -> [Beam] and enter a gain value followed by receiver
[Device] and [Loop] numbers and then select [Enter].
Coarse adjustment
Gain Distance
c. To course align the beam sensor heads activate the alignment option at the
6-9
29-33
56-60
panel. Press the Menu On/Off button and select [Test/Eng] -> [Loop],
momentarily press <etc> and select [Align] type in the receiver address,
select [Device] and type in the transmitter address, select [Loop] and enter
loop address and then select [Enter]. Note the LEDs on the heads will flash
once every
2 seconds:
a 1.9 seconds LED flash will be seen for a large signal
a 100mS LED flash will be seen for a small signal.
2m
10m
100m
&
On changing the gain of the beam receiver, do not:

r power-down the control panel
r or reset the Master Control Board (local controller)
r or reallocate or reset the loop having beam sensors until gain changed
acknowledge followed by the gain number is displayed. Otherwise a Memory
corrupt number will appear on the display.
d.
Adjust the transmitter head in X and Y directions to obtain a long LED flash
signal, allow at least 3 seconds for the flash rate to change. Then lock the
adjusters using the lock nuts.
e.
Repeat d) for the receiver head, to obtain a maximum flash length.
Time averages
f.
Check the time average of the receiver head is between 140-170. Press the
Menu On/Off button and <etc> -> [Usercode] ->[Time Avg] and type in the
2 for channel 2 and select [Device] and type in the receiver device address,
select [Loop] and type in the loop number on which the receiver resides,
select [Enter] and read the time averages on channel 2 of the receiver
head, this should be between 140-170 bits. After each adjustment wait for
5 seconds for a change in the reading.
"
For time average reading above 200 bits carry out an autogain to minimise the
need to fine adjust. To enter auto gain press Menu On/Off button and select [Test/Eng] ->
[Usercode] -> [Loop] -> and momentarily press <etc> to select [AutoGain] and type in the
receiver device number, select [Loop] and enter the loop on which the receiver reside
and select [Enter].
Never [Autogain] a range of devices.
g.
Unlock the lock nuts to allow Y axis adjustment and using the adjusters
move the transmitter head in Y direction, then:
stop on reaching a time average reading 5 bits below the peak value
while counting the number of turns, adjust in the opposite direction to reach 5 bits
below the peak value
finally turn the adjuster half the number of counted turns, towards the peak and
then stop
secure the axis adjusted using the lock nuts
h.
Repeat g) for adjustment in the X direction.
i.
Repeat g) and h) at the receiver head.
j.
Carry out a final [Autogain]. Then recheck the time average reading is
within 140 to 170 band.
k.
Back up the appropriate loop processor card (LPC) (which holds the gain
data) to the Non Volatile Memory using [Back Up] command in the [Set Up]
menu. On completion you must write protect the Non Volatile Memory.
&
Fine adjustment
WEEE Directive:


Do not burn.
Gent by Honeywell reserves the right to revise this publication from time to time and make changes to the content hereof without obligation to notify any person of such revisions of changes.
by Honeywell
Telephone +44 (0) 116 246 2100
Technical Support : www.gentexpert.co.uk
Fax (UK): +44 (0)116 246 2016

4188 856 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

4188 856 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

by Honeywell

Generic Commissioning Instructions

Vigilon Compact Voice Alarm System

Vigilon Fire System

Voice Alarm Zones

EN54 Part 2, 4 & 16

4188-856_issue 5_08/10_Generic Vigilon (Compact + VA) Comms.

A typical commissioning process- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8

Controls and indications - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 16

Second fix parts - - - - - - Remove the protective covers

Vigilon Compact Panel - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 32

Vigilon Compact Voice Alarm Panel - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 43

4188-856_issue 5_08/10_Generic Vigilon (Compact + VA) Comms.

How to create an Engineer PIN - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 52

Checking a loop map - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 56

Non Volatile Memory (NVM) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 57

Loop circuit tests - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 60

Checking device STATUS- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 63

Pre Fire, Fire and Super fire - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 68

4188-856_issue 5_08/10_Generic Vigilon (Compact + VA) Comms.

34000 range of sensors STATES (for reference only) - - - - - - - - 73

Interface Unit STATES - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 75

Installed equipment tests- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 76

Vigilon Compact Network - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 79

Password or PIN code - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 51

Single Vigilon Network - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 84

Multiple Vigilon Networks - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 88

Appendix A-1 - Menu maps for EN54 (V4) Vigilon panels - - - - - 93

Appendix D - Guidelines for Networked system commands - - - - - 146

Appendix E - Cards - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 149

Appendix C - Guidelines for standalone system commands - - - - - 131

4188-856_issue 5_08/10_Generic Vigilon (Compact + VA) Comms.

This is either a caution to prevent damage to the equipment or a

What you will see.

Audio Control Card

N/C or NC Normally closed

N/O or NO Normally open

Distributed Amplifier Unit

O/C or OC Open circuit

Printed circuit board

Display keyboard card

Double pole change over

Power supply unit

Quick blow (fuse)

EEPROM Electrically Erasable

First action byte

Input Output channels

Light emitting diode

Loop processor card

Moving picture expert

Non Volatile Memory

S/C or SC Short circuit

Second action byte

Loss prevention council

Single pole change over

Master control board

Sound pressure level

Main control card or Main

Universal serial bus

Manual call point

What you will hear.

4188-856_issue 5_08/10_Generic Vigilon (Compact + VA) Comms.

Get the feel of the operating condition of areas on the site: